Width: 6.0 inches 152 mm

Dimensions:

Height: 16.0 inches 406 mm Depth: 10.4 inches 264 mm Weight: 18 pounds 8.2 kg

Operating, and Transport Conditions: Temperature: 32 to 122 ºF (0 to +50 ºC) Humidity: 0 to 95 % non-condensing

Storage Conditions: Temperature: 32 to 122 ºF (0 to +50 ºC) Humidity: 0 to 55 % non-condensing Ingress Protection Rating: IP54 NEMA 3

These are the minimum electric service ratings for the QB Alpha controller and the tools it can control.

Tool Model: E02-E23 EA23 EB02−EB22 EC02−EC22

E33-E34 EA33−EA34 EB33-EB34 EC33-EC34

E44-E45 EB44-EB45 EC44

E55 EB55

Current for Supply Voltage: 100 − 126.5V AC 15 A 15 A 200 - 253V AC Required

200 − 253V AC 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A

Power Consumption: Standby 0.2 A 0.2 A 0.2 A 0.2 A Continuous 0.3 kVA 0.7 kVA 1.0kVA 2.2 kVA

The QB Alpha controllers are a modular, high-end, full-featured controller for QPM DC servo power tools with torque transducers.

They will control any QPM E, EA, EB, EC or B series servo motor-powered tool (QB Alpha Specialist and Network Node controllers do not have connections for a corded E, EA, EB, or EC tool ). It utilizes closed loop control of torque, speed and angle so that it can perform various routines for the tool to secure each fastener with the highest quality results. The high precision torque and angle sensors in the tool provide feedback to the QB Alpha controller’s digital control circuit. This circuit compares the feedback values to the programmed values and adjusts the tool’s power and speed values to maintain the programmed speed on the output of the tool until the fastener has achieved the programmed target torque and/or angle value. Once the programmed value is sensed the control circuit turns off the tool leaving the fastener with the desired amount of preload or clamping force. The QB Alpha controllers are certified to IP54 level to withstand the dust, dirt and liquids found in industrial facilities. Installing into other panels is not necessary.

QB Expert, Specialist, and Network Node Alpha controllers have an IEEE 802.11b/g/n radio so that the QPM Cordless line of tools may be added to it as well. Software version 5.2.5 is the first software version to support the QPM cordless tools.

The QB Expert Alpha controller is designed to be a lead controller in a multiple tool system. Multiple systems of up to 24 spindles can be configured and managed by the QB Expert Alpha controller. Trailing controllers used in multiple spindle systems can be QB Advanced Alpha or QB Node Alpha or QPM Cordless tools. The QB Expert Alpha controller can be used as a standalone system as it runs its own corded tool.

The QB Specialist Alpha controller is designed to be a lead controller in a multiple tool system. Multiple systems of up to 24 spindles can be configured and managed by the QB Specialist Alpha controller. Trailing controllers used in multiple spindle systems can be QB Advanced Alpha or QB Node Alpha or QPM Cordless tools. The QB Specialist Alpha controller can be used as a standalone system with up to 15 QPM cordless tools only.

The QB Advanced Alpha controller is designed to be a lead controller in a multiple tool system. Multiple systems of up to 2 spindles can be configured and managed by the QB Advanced Alpha controller. Trailing controllers used in multiple spindle systems can be QB Advanced Alpha or QB Node Alpha controllers. The QB Advanced Alpha controller can be used as a standalone system as it runs its own corded tool.

The QB Standard+ Alpha controller is designed to be a standalone system. Multiple spindles cannot be configured or managed by the QB Standard+ Alpha controller. The QB Standard+ Alpha controller can only be used as a standalone system as it can only run its own corded tool.

The QB Network Node Alpha controller is designed to be a facility network interface for a single or a multiple tool system. Multiple systems of up to 6 cordless spindles can be configured and managed by the QB Network Node Alpha controller. Trailing spindles used in multiple spindle systems can be QPM cordless tools only.

The QB Node Alpha controller is designed to be a trailing spindle in a multiple tool system. Trailing controllers used in multiple spindle systems can be managed by an Alpha Expert, Alpha Specialist, or Alpha Advanced. The QB Node Alpha controller can be used as a standalone system as it runs its own corded tool.

Data associated with 30,000 fastening cycle results and 30,000 traces are stored in the the QB Expert, Advanced, Standard+, and Node Alpha controllers. This data is retrieved with a USB memory stick or Alpha Toolbox.

The QB Network Node, and Specialist Alpha controller does not store fastening cycles or trace data for the attached QPM Cordless tools.

Bolt Count or Error Proofing functions are an integral part of the QB Alpha controllers.

The QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, Standard+ and Network Node Alpha controller’s contain eight inputs and eight outputs on the 24V DC I/O connector. The inputs and outputs support functions to provide expert plant integration to external devices such as a PLC. The inputs and outputs are assignable, and configurable.

The QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, and Network Node Alpha controllers support ModbusTCP, which is standard with these controllers.

The QB Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha controllers support the other optional bus types Ethernet/ IP, Profibus, ProfiNet and DeviceNet. DeviceNet can be ordered as either a scanner or device.

The QB Node Alpha does not have any 24V DC or fieldbus Inputs or Outputs.

The QB Standard+, Node, and Network Node Alpha controllers do not have Ethernet/IP, Profibus, ProfiNet and DeviceNet bus options.

Any computer with a modern web browser connected with an Ethernet cable on the Ethernet network port, or the ATB port, is used to view the QB Alpha controller’s web-based application called Alpha Toolbox. Software is not loaded onto a computer to access the data or configure the controller. Alpha Toolbox updates come with the controller updates.

The QB Expert, Specialist, and Network Nodes Alpha Toolbox can be accessed wirelessly by connecting to the controllers WIFI direclty.

The QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, Standard+ and Network Node Alpha controller’s comes with a software PLC that emulates many commands and features of the Allen Bradley SLC-500 series controller. Anyone with logic writing skills and the Alpha Toolbox PLC Editor can program a logic file to add more versatility to the already abundant features of the QB Alpha controllers.

The QB Node Alpha does not have an embedded PLC.

The QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, and Network Node Alpha controller’s support the XML (2.0, 2.1), PFCS, NPL, TOOLSNET, OPEN and FORD protocols. Ethernet and the Internet Protocol using Transport Control Protocol are a powerful and robust means of moving data from one computer to another. Many end users rely on it to collect information from plant floor equipment. For those that haven’t switched to this more robust means of collecting data, these controllers support PFCS, OPEN and Toyota PI protocols over a serial connection.

The QB Standard+ Alpha controller does not connect to a plant network, nor does it have the industry standard Ethernet protocols.

The QB Node Alpha controller does not have the industry standard Ethernet protocols.

The QB Expert, and Specialist controllers have 4 methods of navigation on the front of the controller used to facilitate menu navigation, make selections, and input data; touchscreen, arrows and toggle button, keypad, and interavtive menu buttons.

The QB Advanced, and Standard+ controllers have 3 methods of navigation on the front of the controller used to facilitate menu navigation, make selections, and input data; arrows and toggle button, keypad, and

interavtive menu buttons.

The QB Node, and Network Node Alpha controllers do not have any way to navigate or input data from the controllers front panel. These controllers are programmed using the embedded software called Alpha Toolbox. See section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95 to learn how to connect and use this software.

Expert & Specialist Advanced & Standard+ Node & Network Node

Labels for the four interactive menu buttons [ 1 ] change with menu selection. If the label is blank, the button has no function for the current screen. The up/down arrows [ 2 ] navigate menu and character selections; the left/right arrows enable backspace and space, as well as navigate between tabs. The Toggle button [ 3 ] switches between modes and selects/accepts choices (synonymous with OK interactive menu button). The numeric keypad [ 4 ] facilitates data input and menu selection (where applicable) and Job/Task selection when enabled. The five LEDs [ 5 ] specify status of the fastening cycle for spindle 1:

–– Red indicates high torque/angle; –– Green indicates an OK fastening cycle; –– Yellow indicates low torque/angle; –– White is programmed by the embedded PLC ( Lead controllers embedded PLC for QB Node Controllers), and –– Blue indicates when the tool is enabled to run. The Orange Wrench icon [ 6 ] indicates preventive maintenance is due on the tool of spindle 1.

The QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, and Standard+ Alpha controllers have a display and keypad that can be used to view, operate, and program. A computer, smart phone, or tablet can also be connected to view, operate, and program using the controllers embedded Alpha Toolbox.

The QB Node, and Network Node Alpha controllers does not have a display or keypad like the other controllers in the family. A computer, smart phone, or tablet is required to connect in order to view, operate, and program. The display on the Advanced or Expert controller can also be used to view/ edit information on the Node controller

when connected as a multiple spindle system.

To navigate between menu items on a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers, use the up/down arrows or, if available, use the keypad to identify the corresponding menu item number.

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers screen, a dropdown arrow appears to the right of menu items with multiple choices. To view choices, highlight the menu item using the up/down arrows then use the Toggle button to expand the dropdown. Use up/down arrows to scroll and the toggle or interactive menu button to select/accept.

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers screen, a menu tree appears beside

related menu items.

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers, tabs appear at the top when multiple menu selections exist. To navigate between tabs, use the left/right arrows.

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers, this scrollbar enables adding: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, space, _, -, &, *, $, #, @, !, and a period (language and/ or field determines character availability). The up arrow [ 1 ] and down arrow [ 3 ] direct scrolling with the active character [ 2 ] displayed between. Use the QB Alpha controller’s up/down arrows to scroll through character choices. The left arrow backspaces. The right arrow moves one position to the right to input the next character. Push Toggle button or OK interactive menu button to accept entry. The following screens are examples that contain the character scrollbar option: ALL, Job (Name), Task (Name) Step (Name), System (Name General), System (Users), WIFI (SSID, Password), and other releated fields that require custom inputs.

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers, the Run screen displays normal operating information one spindle at a time. To display a different spindle on a multiple spindle unit press the right or left arrow key to switch to the next spindle tab. Icons identify events [ 1 ], see list below. [ 2 ] The last torque and angle readings with units, when a tool is connected. Up/down arrows next to the torque or angle value indicate the last fastening cycle NOK status whether it exceeded (up) or did not achieve (down) torque or angle limits. Identifies the active Job [ 6 ] and active Task [ 7 ]. Identifies Target batch count [ 3 ] and Accumulated bolt count [ 4 ] for the active Job. The side scroll bar indicates events are available in the Event Log. Press the down arrow to view the events. A Shutoff code is also displayed when applicable [ 8 ]. The display

also has the current time [ 10 ] for the specified region and fastening cycle history in the Fastening cycle Log [ 9 ]. This [ 11 ] portion of the screen changes to an orange bar with white background when either Limit Rejects or Job Timer parameters are used. The orange bar increments in one division of the width equal to the Reject Count value each time a NOK cycle occurs. This bar also acts as a progress bar for the Job Timer to indicate the progress of the timer. The time display [ 10 ] will change in the following manner: When a Part ID is received the time will change to the Part ID for 5 seconds and then return to the clock. If the Job or Task has been selected the Job Name:Task Name appear on the screen until the batch count (Job) has been completed and then returns to the clock.

The Run screen displays unless other programming functions [ 5 ] are in use. The display background color turns red in the event of a fault; see section “1.5 Safety” on page 15. The run display changes to indicate the step in which the tool stopped (providing it did not stop during the audit step).

The Fastening Cycle Log [ 9 ] lists the fastening cycles that have occurred in the QB Alpha controllers. While viewing the Run Display press the down arrow to access the Fastening Cycle Log. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll through the data listed chronologically (newest at the top, oldest at the bottom). Each line identifies a fastening cycle. The first column indicates the fastening cycle status or shutoff code. The second column indicates the achieved torque during the fastening cycle. The third column indicates the achieved angle during the fastening cycle. The fourth column indicates the working bolt count.

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers, make sure the the Run screen is displayed, next press the down arrow and then press the interactive MANAGE button after selecting a data line to display the MANAGE dialog box.

Use the up/down arrow keys and the interactive OK button, or the Toggle button, or the number keys, to select the action required. Export Rundowns will transfer all fastening cycle data to the USB memory stick after choosing a file name. Export Trace will transfer fastening cycle trace data to the USB memory stick after choosing a file name. Choose between the selected trace, the number of traces in the population size or all traces to be exported. When exporting the SELECTED trace it exports as a comma seperated value file. If POPULATION or ALL are selected the appropriate number of traces are placed into a zip file before exporting. If selecting All, be aware it will take a significant amount of time before all traces are put into the zip file and exported. Delete Rundowns will delete all fastening cycle and trace data from the QB Alpha controller. This action cannot be undone.

Press the interactive YES button to delete the data. Press the interactive NO button to cancel the delete action. Use the following sequence to save a Rundown or Trace file: Insert a USB memory stick into the USB port on the bottom of the QB Alpha controller. Use the down arrow to select the Name field. Use the Toggle button to enter edit mode. Use the left arrow to delete the name. Use the up/down arrows or the numeric keypad to write a new file name if required. Press the interactive OK button or the Toggle button to accept the file name.

Press again to save the file to the USB memory stick. Press the interactive EXIT button to return to the Run screen.

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers, make sure the the Run screen is displayed, next press the down arrow and then press the interactive DETAILS button after selecting a data line to display the DETAILS dialog box. Details about the event and when it occurred are listed.

Rundown ID: The sequential number of the fastening cycle data

Date: The date the fastening cycle was ran.

Time: The time the fastening cycle completed.

Job: The active Job number in which the fastening cycle ran.

Task: The active Task number in which the fastening cycle ran.

Status: The overal status of the fastening cycle.

Not all items are shown

SOC: Shutoff Code, see relevant section for more information

Job Count: The active fastener number for the Job.

Task Count: The active fastener number for the Task.

Tool Model: The model number of the tool used during this fastening cycle.

Tool Serial: The serial number of the tool used during this fastening cycle.

Tool Temp: The temperature of the tool at shutoff.

Part ID: The value in the Part ID buffer when the fastening cycle ran.

TC/AM The Strategy or Smart Step used in the current step.

Torque: The Torque value achieved in the current step.

Angle The Angle value achieved in the current step.

Current The Current value achieved in the current step.

Rate The Rate value achieved in the current step (if enabled)

Deviation The Rate Deviation achieved in the current step (if enabled)

Use the up/down arrows to scroll through the Details. Press the interactive BACK button to return to the Fastening Cycle Log.

TIME Fastening cycle time exceeds programmed Cycle Abort time value.

STOP Spindle stopped by either the operator or other device.

>115% Spindle stopped due to torque achieving greater than 115% torque limit for the tool.

FAULT The tool shutoff due to a Fault. See section “1.5 Safety” on page 15.

STALL Spindle stopped due to a stall.

SYNC Spindle failed fastening cycle due to a synchronization error.

T1≠T2 Primary and secondary redundant transducer values are outside comparative limits.

A1≠A2 Primary and secondary redundant angle values are outside comparative limits.

TD Spindle stopped due to torque dropping below Torque Drop Threshold

YIELD Spindle stopped due to bailout on detecting yield during an Angle Control strategy.

[T] A torque/angle window violation for the Torque Monitoring portion of the fastening cycle.

RATE Torque Rate has exceeded the High Limit or not achieved the Low Limit during a Rate Monitoring portion of the fastening cycle.

I Current has exceeded the High Current Limit or not achieved the Low Current Limit.

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers, make sure the the Run screen is displayed, next press the down arrow and then press the interactive TRACE button after selecting a data line to display the TRACE dialog box. A Torque vs. Time trace screen is drawn for the highlighted line.

Press the third interactive menu button to change the trace axes. Use the up/down arrow keys and the interactive OK button or the Toggle button, or the number keys, to select the type required. 1. Torque – Torque vs. time 2. Angle – Angle vs. time 3. Torque/Angle – Torque vs. Angle 4. Speed – Tool Speed vs. time. Press the interactive BACK or EXIT buttons to leave the trace screen.

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers, when Keypad Mode is set to Job or Task Select at the run screen press the Toggle button or a number on the keypad. A Job/Task window opens. Use the numbers on the keypad to type in a Job/Task to be selected to run. Use the toggle or interactive OK button to accept and switch controller operation to the selected Job/Task number. When the Keypad Mode is set to PART ID (see “3.1.4.1 General Tab” on page 75) at the run screen press the Toggle button or a number on the keypad. A PART ID window opens. Use the up/down arrows to write a character, then the right arrow to move to the next character value to use as the PART ID. The numeric keypad may also be used to write numbers as PART ID. Press the OK interactive menu button to save it. The limit is 32 characters.

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controller screens, there are Icons that indicate the status of the controller. They are located in the upper left corner of the controllers screen and on Alpha toolbox they are located on the bottom left hand side of the web browser window.

Locked A password is required to make edits.

Unlocked Edits are possible, automatically re-locks in time.

Busy/working Wait for icon to clear before continuing.

Fault; system not operable Check the run screen for Fault message.

Remote User A user is editing the parameters in the controller remotely, i.e. through Alpha Toolbox.

Audi Command Port Connected The controller is connected to an AUDI XML protocol server on the Command port.

Audi Results Port Connected The controller is connected to an AUDI XML protocol server on the Results port.

PFCS Solicited Port Connected The controller is connected to a PFCS protocol server on the Solicited port.

PFCS Un-Solicited Port Connected The controller is connected to a PFCS protocol server on the Un-Solicited port.

OPEN Connected The controller is connected to an OPEN protocol server.

Toolsnet Connected The controller is connected to a Toolsnet protocol server.

ToytotaPI Connected The controller is connected to a ToyotaPI protocol server.

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers, the Run screen display background color in normal operation is white. In the event of a fault, the spindle display and the time display backgrounds turn red and the fault description appears on screen. The background color reverts to original only when the fault is cleared.

Here is a list of the Faults in the QB Alpha controllers:

Overcurrent Fault! Total Current – the controller software limits the current applied to any tool based on what the tool can handle. This fault is asserted if the total current applied is greater than allowed.

The Ground Fault Interrupter has exceeded its current trip point. A current detector monitors the current through the three phases of the motor and asserts this fault when the total current applied to the tool does not equal the total current returned from the tool. All phases are turned off immediately to protect the controller from shorts at the tool end.

GFI Fault!

Logic Voltage Fault! The controller monitors the +5VDC, -5VDC and +12VDC of its onboard Power Supply. This fault is asserted when those voltages fall outside of nominal range.

Position Feedback Fault! The controller is constantly monitoring the resolver zero and span points and asserts this fault if they go outside specification.

Transducer Span Fault! This fault is asserted when the transducer zero point has shifted far enough to prevent a full scale reading from the transducer.

Transducer Zero Fault! This fault is asserted when the transducer zero point has shifted far enough to prevent drift compensation at the zero point.

Temperature Fault! This fault is asserted when the tool temperature detector has reached the temperature limit set by the Temperature Limit parameter. It resets after detected temperature has dropped by 5°C.

Unrecognized Tool! The controller is communicating to the tool but does not recognize the model number written in the tool memory board.

Tool Communications! The controller is not communicating to a tool.

Transducer Current Fault! Transducer current has fallen outside nominal values. For EA, EB, B and EC series tools that is 4.16 mA +/- 75% (1 to 7mA).

Unsupported Tool! The wrong tool type has been connected to the controller. The Alpha controller cannot run the tool that is connected.

Servo Connection Fault! The CPU has lost communication to the DSP on the Logic board. This may happen on a reboot after and upgrade as the CPU resets before the DSP.

Spindle Communications The lead controller loses communications with a trailing spindle controller.

Battery Fault! Split stack voltage reading out of range.

Low Battery Fault! The battery voltage is too low to complete the next rundown.

This fault is asserted when the QPM Cordless tools power communication module temperature detector has reached the temperature limit of 65°C. It resets after detected temperature has dropped by 5°C.

Heatsink Temperature Fault!

On a QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers, messages appear on the screen when certain non-critical conditions exist. They may appear on any screen at any time.

Communication Fault Used for Toyota PI protocol only. Controller has lost communications to the PI box.

Count Fault Used for Toyota PI protocol only. Controller and PI box have a bolt count mismatch.

Program Fault Used for Toyota PI protocol only. More Fastening cycles were performed than the PI box expected.

Tool Update Failed Controller failed to update the tool configuration.

PLC Message A user defined message controlled by the internal PLC.

Invalid PLC File Appears when an invalid PLC file is imported into the controller.

Identifying Spindle Appears when the controller is identifying a trailing spindle, when the trailing spindle connects or when the interactive IDENTIFY button is pressed.

Heatsink Tempeature Warning!

This warning is asserted when the QPM Cordless tools power communication module temperature detector has reached the temperature of 60°C..

Along with the onscreen indication, the blue light on the controller and tool MFP extinguishes and the STOPPED output asserts. Tool Disabled Explanations: Undefined Task – The selected Task is not programmed to run an audit step; select another Task or program currently selected Task. Invalid Job/Task – Appears when a Job or Task number less than one or greater than 255 is selected. Network Protocol – The plant control system issued a Stop via a network protocol. Wait for the protocol to remove the Stop command. Error Proofing – Error Proofing is turned on and either a Batch count has been met, or the Job has not been reset. Reset with a Job Reset input. Stop Issued – An Input is disabling the tool; remove the Stop input. May also be caused by Job/ Task Verify inputs not matching selected Job/ Task. System Initializing – The controller is booting up, please wait. Cycle Lock-out – The Cycle Lockout timer is active, wait for it to reset. Reject Count Exceeded – Indicates the Reject Count has been exceeded. Internal PLC – The internal PLC is commanding the tool to STOP. Not Armed – There are two things that can cause this event: 1. Tubenuts – By default tubenut tools require arming by tapping the MFB before the trigger is pressed to run the tool. 2. Reset Reject – The fastening cycle is NOK and the MFB mode is set to Reset Reject preventing the tool from running until the MFB is pressed to reset the NOK.

Tool Disabled

• Never set control limits above the maximum rating of the tool.

• Setting control limits above the maximum rating of the tool can cause high reaction torque.

• Always test for proper tool operation after programming the controller.

The following provides a guide for programming the QB Expert, Specialist, Advanced, or Standard+ Alpha controllers.

The QB Network Node, and Node Alpha controller is programmed using the embedded software called Alpha Toolbox. See section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95 to learn how to connect and use this software. The controller uses three main menus to display information and enable programming:

To begin programming a tool strategy, press the SETUP interactive menu button.

1. Jobs – use to perform tool strategy programming such as torque and speed parameters. 2. Communications – use to program Ethernet, serial port, fieldbus and network protocol options. 3. Other – use to set parameters for all other features, including system level, users, passwords, I/O and tool functions. 4. Full Backup / Restore – use to backup/restore/delete programming and return controller to factory defaults. To access, press the corresponding menu number on the keypad, or use the up/down arrow keys to highlight then press the Toggle button.

This area changes the settings of the Jobs, Tasks, Steps, tool strategies, error-proofing, and bolt counting. Users must have SETUP or ADMINISTRATOR access level to modify values in this area.

If no tool is attached or if at least one Job exists, the Job tab appears allowing for expert user programming.

Identifies the values used for controlling the tool during the a step. Choose the strategy required for the Audit step of the Job and Task being programmed. See section “3.1.2.4 Step Button” on page 52 for an explanation of the strategies. • TORQUE - Torque Control/ Angle Monitor (TC/AM) • ANGLE - Angle Control/ Torque Monitor (AC/TM) • TORQUE & ANGLE - Torque Control/ Angle Control (TC/AC)

Strategy

Batch Count The number of fasteners required to be secured in a Task. Typically used with an error proofing scheme and remote input and output device. Acceptable values are between 1 and 99. The default value is 1.

Tool operating units: = 1 FT LB = 1 NM

• NM, Newton Meters 1.355818 1 • FT LB, Foot Pounds 1 0.7375621 • IN LB, Inch Pounds 12 8.850745 • IN OZ, Inch Ounces 192 141.6119 • KG M, Kilogram Meters 0.1382552 0.1019716 • KG CM, Kilogram Centimeters 13.82552 10.19716 • N CM, Newton Centimeters 135.5818 100 • N DM, Newton Decimeters 13.55818 10

Units

Thread Direction Use CW (clockwise) for tightening right hand fasteners. Use CCW (counter-clockwise) for tightening left hand fasteners.

To modify a parameter, select the parameter using the up/down arrow keys then press the Toggle button, otherwise use Alpha Toolbox to modify a parameter. Enter the appropriate value then press the Toggle button or Enter if using Alpha Toolbox. After all parameters/ selections/options are finished, press the NEXT interactive menu button to advance through the Wizard. Repeat for subsequent windows. Press the PREV interactive menu button to move back to previously programmed screens within the Wizard. Press the CANCEL interactive menu button at any time to stop Wizard operation.

TC/AM Selected

High Torque The maximum allowed torque during this step. The Wizard uses the rated torque for the connected tool.

Low Torque The minimum allowed torque during this step. The Wizard uses zero as the low torque limit of the strategy.

Speed The speed of the tool’s output in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The Wizard uses the maximum speed of the connected tool.

AC/TM Selected

Snug Torque The point in this step when the controller begins to monitor the tool’s output angle.

High Angle The maximum allowed angle in degrees during this step. The Wizard chooses the maximum value as default.

Low Angle The minimum allowed angle during this step. The Wizard chooses the value of zero degrees as default.

AC/TC Selected

See parameter definitions from the other selected strategies. The Audit step is now defined. The Wizard uses the median value, between the High and Low parameters, as the Target. It also calculates and programs other parameters automatically, including: Snug Torque, Threshold Torque, Statistical Torque and High Angle Bailout. Change these values after saving Wizard programming if desired.

Next, select the controls (Smart Steps) specific to your application and the downshift mode, ATC+(Adaptive tightening control plus) if checke, or no downshift if not selected. The downshift mode can be changed later if ATC (Adaptive Tightening Control), or a manual downshift setting is desired, see “Downshift Mode” on page 57 for a full explanation of each downshift type. Multiple step strategies are ways of using more than one step to meet the requirements of a difficult joint. The following features are available through multiple strategies programmed via the Wizard. Select or deselect the controls specific to your application. Press the NEXT interactive menu button to view the option screens for each specific control chosen. The Wizard makes assumptions, calculates and presents specific values. Modify these values if necessary.

Not Selected

Selected

Creates a Smart Step with an Angle Control/Torque Monitoring strategy that rotates the fastener in the opposite direction as the Audit step is programmed. The fastener threads align with the locking device threads before standard forward rotation and high speed are applied (prevents cross-threads). If selected, this is the first step in the tool strategy. Options include:

Angle Target The number of degrees of rotation the socket turns during this step. The Wizard uses 360˚ by default.

Wobble

Speed The speed of the tool’s output in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The Wizard uses 60 RPM as default.

Max Torque The maximum allowed torque during this step. A low value is calculated by the Wizard to detect cross-threads and double hits (Re- hits).

Creates a Smart Step with an Angle Control/Torque Monitoring strategy that rotates the fastener in the same direction as the Audit step is programmed. The flats of the socket align with the flats on the fastener before standard forward rotation and high speed are applied. Using Slow Seek as a first step also allows for cross-thread and re-hit detection. If selected, this is the first step AFTER Wobble. Options include:

Angle Target The number of degrees of rotation the socket turns during this step. The Wizard uses 180˚ by default.

Slow Seek

Speed The speed of the tool’s output in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The Wizard uses 60 RPM as default.

Max Torque The maximum allowed torque during this step. A low value is calculated by the Wizard to detect cross-threads and double hits (Re-hits).

In some fastening situations, the initial fastening cycle torque is as high as or higher than the target torque specification limit for the joint. In other cases, such as thread rolling or forming, overcoming friction in getting the fastener started causes the high initial torque. In order to compensate for this high initial torque, the Self Tap control allows the controller to drive the tool for a specified amount of angle at the start of a fastening cycle. Creates a Smart Step with an Angle Control/Torque Monitoring strategy in the same direction as the Audit step is programmed. If selected, this is the first step AFTER Slow Seek. Options include: Snug Torque, Angle Target, Speed, Max Torque.

Snug Torque The point in this step when the controller begins to monitor the tool’s output angle.

Self Tap

Angle Target The number of degrees of rotation the socket turns during this step. The Wizard uses 800˚ by default.

Speed The speed of the tool’s output in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The Wizard uses the rated speed of the tool in RPM as default.

Max Torque The maximum allowed torque during this step. The Wizard uses the tool’s rated torque to prevent any interference.

Creates two Smart Steps before the Audit step. The first step is a Torque Control/Angle Monitoring strategy that rotates the fastener in the same direction as the Audit step is programmed. This runs a fastener down to an initial torque level. The second is a Back off strategy which partially removes the fastener. The purpose of this procedure is to polish the threads and reduce friction variation during the Audit step. This ensures more consistent results. If selected, this is the first step AFTER Self Tap and Pre-Torque. Options include:

Down Target Torque The Target Torque for this step prior to the Back off.

Condition Fastener

Delay Time The time delay before the controller starts the next sequential step. Triggered when the tool meets the Down Torque Target and entered in seconds. The Wizard uses 0.05 seconds by default.

Max Time The maximum time permissible to have the tool energized during this step. Entered in seconds.

Angle Target The target angle for the Back off step. The Wizard uses 360˚ by default.

The pre-torque runs the fastener to a preliminary torque level and suspends the fastening cycle for a period of time. After a time delay, the Audit step begins. Creates a Smart Step with a Torque Control/Angle Monitoring strategy in the same direction as the Audit step is programmed. If selected, this is the first step AFTER Self Tap. Options include:

Pre-Torque

Torque Target The Target Torque for this step. The Wizard uses the Audit step’s Low Torque value by default.

Delay Between Steps The time period to suspend the tool strategy before continuing entered in seconds. The Wizard uses 0.05 seconds as default.

Creates a Torque Control/ Angle Monitor Strategy used for Torque recovery (relaxation in a joint) after the Audit step. The wizard makes the Torque Recovery step the Audit Step. The Torque Recovery step will inherit the High, Low, and Target torque values set during the Audit step setup. Sets Merge Torque to Yes. Sets Accumulate Angle to Yes. Sets Torque Display to Final for both steps. For implementation description see”10.3 Torque Recovery Implementation” on page 198

Relaxation Time This is the value for the Delay Between Steps of the first TC/AM step prior to running the Torque Recovery step. The Wizard uses 0.05 seconds as default.

Speed The Speed of the tool’s output in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) during the Torque Recovery step. The Wizard uses 10 RPM as default.

Torque Recovery

If the achieved angle in the Torque Recovery step exceeds the Rotation Threshold the torque and angle values displayed and saved are the final torque and final angle of the Torque Recovery step. If the achieved angle in the Torque Recovery step does not exceed the Rotation Threshold in the Torque Recovery step, the torque value displayed and saved is the final torque of the first TC/AM step, and the angle value displayed is the final angle of the Recovery step. The Wizard uses 0 degrees as default.

Rotation Threshold

Accommodates assembly procedures requiring partial removal of the fastener before additional components can be added to the joint. Creates a Back off strategy Smart Step after the Audit step. The tool stops after achieving either the angle or torque target. If selected, this is the first step AFTER the Audit step. Options include:

Angle Target The number of degrees of rotation the socket turns during this step. The Wizard uses 1800˚ by default.

Backout

Torque Target The Target Torque for this step. The Wizard uses the tool’s rated torque as default.

Speed The speed of the tool’s output in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The Wizard uses the rated speed of the tool in RPM as default.

In some fastening situations sockets become stuck on the fasteners. This step reverses the tool and releases the socket without loosening the fastener. Creates an Angle Control or Torque Control (AC/TC) strategy Smart Step that rotates the fastener in the opposite direction of the Audit step. Options include:

Angle Target The number of degrees of rotation the socket turns during this step. The Wizard uses 50˚ by default.

Fastener Release

Speed The speed of the tool’s output in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The Wizard uses the rated speed of the tool in RPM as default.

Max Torque The maximum allowed torque during this step. The Wizard uses 50% of the rated torque of the tool by default.

Press the FINISH interactive menu button to close the Wizard.

The Job tab screen appears. This allows manual editing of parameters prior to saving Wizard programming.

To save, press the EXIT interactive menu button on the controller, then press the YES interactive menu button to save changes. This saves the parameters and opens the Run screen. If using Alpha toolbox, ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

The maximum number of Jobs in the Expert, Advanced, Standard Plus controllers is 255.

Specialist Controllers do not store Jobs on the controller. The number of Jobs a wirelessly paired B-Series tool is based on the B-Series Cordless tool memory. B-Series Cordless tools contain their own memory of Jobs/ Tasks/ Steps. Select Jobs by pressing the SETUP interactive menu button on the Run screen. If using Alpha toolbox, this menu is already expanded and does not require selection of the SETUP Menu.

Press 1 or highlight Jobs selection and press the Toggle button.

If using Alpha toolbox, select Jobs from the run screen.

There can be more than one Job. Use the left/right arrow keys to select the tab/Job for modifying. If using alpha toolbox, simply select the desired job to edit in the expanded list of Jobs along the left edge of the browser.

Name the Job to define the operation performed (15 character maximum). Use the up/ down arrows to spell with letters or use the numeric keypad. When using the PFCS protocol a Machine ID value must be entered here. This name will appear on the Run screen when the Job is selected.

This is a mask that when equal to an incoming PART ID (barcode scan) this Job is selected as the active Job. The PART ID can come from the USB port, serial port, a network protocol, a fieldbus input, the internal PLC or the keypad itself. Use periods (.) to mask the negligible portions of the PART ID; use the exact characters in their exact PART ID positions to select the Job. Example: If a PART ID is 123ABC and if the 3A determines when this Job is to run (the third and fourth positions), then enter “..3A..” as the parameter value. Notice that the periods (.) match the length of the expected PART ID.

Barcode Id

Setting this parameter to Yes will allow the selected Job’s bolt count to increment on both OK and NOK fastening cycles. If set to No the Job’s bolt count will increment only on OK fastening cycles.

Increment Count on NOK

When set to Yes, the QB Alpha controller automatically sequences from Task 1 through each Task to the final Task in the Job after the fastener count in each Task is complete. The value of No requires an input to select the Task to run within a Job.

Auto Sequence Tasks

Auto Reset Job The value of Yes resets the Job automatically after the Batch Count has been met. The tool will not disable with Error Proofing enabled. The value of No requires an Input to Reset the Job.

The value of Yes causes the tool to disable after the accumulated fastener count equals the target fastener count for the job, unless Auto Reset Job is set to Yes. A Trigger or Input is required to Reset the Job and set the accumulated count to zero. Yes also enables more parameters that will dynamically appear on the screen, see below. The value of No keeps the tool enabled even after the Job’s target count is met. The count will not increase beyond the target value. The value of No will not cause new parameters to appear.

This section identifies whether the tool removes the Disassembly (Reverse) function on one of the following events:

Yes does not allow the use of Disassembly mode after each OK fastening cycle. The tool can be used to back out fasteners after a NOK fastening cycle. No allows the use of Disassembly mode after any fastening cycle unless the logic of the following two events is met.

On Cycle OK

Yes does not allow the use of Disassembly mode after the active Job is complete (accumulated count equals target count). No allows the use of Disassembly mode after a Job is complete unless the logic of the other two events is met.

Disable Disassembly

On Job Complete

Enable Error Proofing

Yes does not allow the use of Disassembly mode after all fasteners have been removed i.e. accumulated count is back to zero. No allows the use of Disassembly mode after all fasteners have been removed unless the logic of the above two events is met.

On All Fasteners Removed

This identifies whether the tool disables after each Task has completed. This requires a Reset Job, Task Select or Task Select Bit input to select an incomplete Task which enables the tool for an incomplete Task only. If Auto Sequence Task is used, the tool re- enables when the active Task switches to an incomplete Task.

Disable Assembly

Yes disables the tool when the active Task is complete. If an input switches the controller to a completed Task, the tool is disabled. If an input switches the controller to an incomplete Task, the tool is enabled to complete the Task. No will not disable the tool when the active Task is complete.

On Task Complete

A value of YES invokes the Job Timer. The Job Timer starts when the first bolt of the batch count exceeds Threshold Torque (In Cycle) and stops when the programmed number of seconds has elapsed. If the timer times out before the batch count is complete the Job is set to complete, the tool is disabled and the Job Complete output is energized. A value of No disables the Job Timer.

Enable Job Timer

Job Timer Value is in seconds. Maximum is 9999 seconds, minimum is 1 seconds.

Adds a Job to the controller. If a tool is attached, the Wizard begins for easy setup of parameters. If a tool is not attached, the Jobs tab appears for manual parameter setup.

Jobs do not have to be added sequentially. A Job can be added before or after the one that is selected. Jobs renumber automatically after being added. Make a selection and press the OK interactive menu button to add a Job, or CANCEL to not add a Job.

Delete Deletes the selected Job from the controller. Jobs cannot be recovered once deleted.

Copy Copies the selected Job and its associated Tasks and Steps to the Clipboard.

Paste Overwrites the selected Job with the values residing in the Clipboard. To copy/ move a Job: first create a new Job where it is needed, then copy the Job to be moved, then paste it into the new Job created and delete the original if required.

Imports the selected Job file from the USB memory stick and overwrites all Jobs in the controller. Insert a USB memory stick into the USB port on the bottom of the controller. Use the up and down arrow keys to select Import. Scroll through the files on the USB memory stick until the desired file is selected. Press the OK interactive menu button to import the file. Press EXIT then YES to save the file.

Import

Writes all Jobs and their parameters to a Job file on the USB memory stick. Use the following sequence to save a Jobs file.

Use the down arrow to select the Name field. Use the Toggle button to enter edit mode. Use the left arrow to delete the name. Use the up/down arrows or the numeric keypad to write a new file name. Press the interactive OK button or the Toggle button to accept the file name. Press again to save the file to the USB memory stick.

Export

Press the interactive OK button to acknowledge the save.

Press the EXIT interactive menu button to save changes and return to the Run screen. See section “1.3 CE Directives (Europe)” on page 13.

The maximum number of Tasks in the Expert, Advanced, Standard Plus controllers is 99. Share these Tasks between the programmed Jobs. There can be up to 99 Tasks per Job.

Specialist Controllers do not store Tasks on the controller. The number of Tasks a wirelessly paired B-Series tool is based on the B-Series Cordless tool memory. B-Series Cordless tools contain their own memory of Jobs/ Tasks/ Steps. Select Tasks by pressing the TASK interactive menu button. Use the left/right arrow keys to select the tab/Task for modifying. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired task to edit in the expanded list of tasks along the left edge of the browser.

Name Name the Task to define the operation performed (15 character maximum). Use the up/ down arrows for letters or use the numeric keypad.

Batch Count This is the number of OK fastening cycles the Task is required to count before it is completed OK. Zero is not allowed. The default value is 1. The maximum is 99.

Limits the number of NOK (Not OK) fastening cycles in a Task. If the limit is achieved the tool is disabled. Use Reset Job, Task Select or Task Select Bit inputs to recover. Yes turns this function on and increases the Task menu to insert the Reject Count parameter. No turns this function off. The default value is No.

Limit Rejects

Reject Count The maximum number of NOK fastening cycles allowed during this Task. The default value is 3.

Units Operating torque units. See section “3.1.1.1 Wizard Screens” on page 39 for a list of available units. Each Task does not have to use the same operating torque units as the other Tasks. The default value is Nm.

The efficiency compensation of accessories (Example: Swivel Socket) added to the end of the tool that may decrease the final torque of the tool. This value can be 100%-80%. The default value is 100%. If this value is lowered from 100%, the tool will expect that there is an additional efficiency loss at the output. If no accessory is added to the end of the tool and this value is lowered from 100%, the final torque value will end higher than expected. This will affect only the Task that thisvalue is changed within.

Efficiency

Thread Direction For tightening a right-hand fastener use clockwise (CW). Use counter-clockwise (CCW) for left-hand fasteners. The default value is clockwise (CW).

Threshold Torque The torque level during the fastening cycle when the In Cycle output transitions high. Data is not stored, or available to Alpha Toolbox, unless Threshold Torque is exceeded during the fastening cycle. A good starting point is 20% of Target Torque. The default value is 0.

Statistical Torque The torque level required to be exceeded before the fastening cycle data is included into Statistics or sent via a network protocol. The default value is 0.

The speed of the tool during (Reverse) operation in RPM (revolutions per minute). The default value is 9999. To limit the speed of the tool reduce this parameter to a value less than the maximum speed of the tool.

Disassembly Speed

Disassembly Acceleration The rate at which the tool gets to Disassembly Speed in RPM/s (revolutions per minute per second). The default value is 3,000.

Cycle Lock-Out This is a timer, in seconds, that activates after the tool has reached its target. While active, the tool is disabled.

This section sets values used in determining fastening cycle torque rate used in the Rate Control or Yield Control strategies.

Number of Torque samples averaged for the Rate calculation. Calculates a running average from torque samples taken every millisecond. A higher number gives a smoother Rate. The default value is 10 m sec.

Torque Average

Torque Rate

Angle Interval Used to calculate the Torque vs. Angle Rate. Larger intervals may give a smoother Rate. The default value is 20°.

Modified A value that is changed by the controller to indicate the date and time parameter values were last changed in this Task or associated Steps.

Adds a Task to the controller. If a tool is attached, the Wizard begins for easy setup of parameters. If a tool is not attached the Tasks tab appears for manual parameter setup.

Tasks do not have to be added sequentially. A Task can be added before or after the one that is selected. Tasks renumber automatically after being added. Make a selection and press OK to add a Task, or CANCEL to not add a Task

Delete Deletes the selected Task from the controller. Tasks cannot be recovered once deleted.

Copy Copies the selected Task and its associated Steps to the Clipboard.

Paste Overwrites the selected Task with the values residing in the Clipboard. To copy/ move a Task: first create a new Task where it is needed, than copy the Task to be moved, then paste into the new Task created and delete the original if required.

Press the EXIT interactive menu button to save changes and return to the Run screen. See section “1.3 CE Directives (Europe)” on page 13. Press the CANCEL interactive menu button to return to the Job level. If using Alpha toolbox, ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Step settings only affect the selected Job and Task. There can be only one Audit step per Task. Each Step is represented by its own tab. Use the left/right arrow keys to select the tab/Step for modifying. There are a maximum of 12 Steps in each Task. The parameters for all strategy types are listed. Not all parameters are shown on the display at one time. Use the scroll bar on the display to view more parameters.

Name Provides an identifier for the step (15 characters maximum). Use the up/down arrows for letters or use the numeric keypad.

Identifies values used to control the tool during a Step and to control the Step’s direction. Strategies include:

TC / AM Torque Control with Angle Monitor. The controller shuts off the tool when the target torque value is achieved. The controller also monitors angle which can indicate changes in joint rate. Audit Step torque and angle results must fall within their specified limits for the fastening cycle to be acceptable (OK).

Strategy (Standard)

AC / TM Angle Control with Torque Monitor. The controller shuts off the tool when the target angle value is achieved after a selected snug torque value. The controller also monitors torque. Audit Step torque and angle readings must fall within their specified limits for the fastening cycle to be acceptable.

AC / TC Angle Control and Torque Control. This strategy enables precision control for both torque and angle on critical joints. The controller shuts off the tool when both a target torque value and a target angle value are achieved after a selected snug torque value occurs. Audit Step final torque and angle results must fall within their specified limits for the fastening cycle to be acceptable. The controller also shuts off the tool when it determines that target torque and angle cannot be reached (i.e. Bailout limits have been achieved). Angle Control or Torque Control. The controller shuts off the tool when either a target torque value or a target angle value is achieved after a selected snug torque value occurs. Bailouts are set to the targets. Audit Step final torque and angle results must fall within their specification limits for the fastening cycle to be judged acceptable.

Strategy (Advanced)

AC / TA Angle Control with Torque Average. The controller performs a standard Angle Control strategy with the exception that the torque results are the average torque achieved during the step.

RC / AM Rate Control with Angle Monitor. The controller shuts off the tool when the rising target rate value is achieved after a selected snug torque value. The controller also monitors angle. Audit Step torque and angle readings must fall within their specified limits for the fastening cycle to be acceptable.

YC / AM Yield Control with Angle Monitor. The controller shuts off the tool when the falling target rate value is achieved after a selected snug torque value. The controller also monitors angle. Audit Step torque and angle readings must fall within their specified limits for the fastening cycle to be acceptable. For implementation description see “10.4 Fastener Yield Control Implementation” on page 198

Strategy (Advanced)

BACK OFF Reverse Angle Control or Torque Control. The controller runs the tool in the opposite direction and shuts off the tool when either a lowering target torque value or a target angle value. Torque has priority over Angle. Which means the tool will shut off if torque target is reached before the angle target. Audit Step torque and angle readings must fall within their specification limits for the fastening cycle to be judged acceptable.

PC / TM Position Control with Torque Monitor. The controller shuts off the tool when the tool zero position is achieved after a selected snug torque value. The controller also monitors the torque. Audit Step torque and angle readings must fall within their specified limits for the fastening cycle to be acceptable.

Torque Target The torque at which the controller shuts off the tool. Should be greater than Low Torque and lower than High Torque. Units are the selected torque units.

The maximum peak torque for an acceptable fastening cycle (required for all steps). If the actual torque exceeds this limit the fastening cycle will be flagged as NOK and the RED LED on the front panel and tool illuminates. Must be greater than Torque Target and less than or equal to the rated torque marked on the tool. Units are the selected torque units.

High Torque

The minimum peak torque for an acceptable fastening cycle. If the actual torque does not reach this limit, the fastening cycle is flagged as NOK and the YELLOW LED on the front panel and tool illuminates. Must be less than the Torque Target. Units are the selected torque units.

Low Torque

Torque Display Selects which achieved torque value to store, display and use to compare against limits for fastening cycle status. PEAK will choose the peak torque during the step, FINAL will choose the torque at peak angle during the step.

Yes carries the angle over from the previous step. The angle value is from the previous step’s Snug Torque to this active step’s peak angle. No turns this function off. The default is NO requiring a Snug Torque value for this step.

Accumulate Angle

Snug Torque The point in the step when the controller begins to monitor the tool’s output angle. Should be greater than 0 and less than Low Torque. A value of 50% of Torque Target is a good starting point. Units are the selected torque units.

Angle Target The angle at which the controller shuts off the tool after a selected Snug Torque value. Should be greater than Low Angle and lower than High Angle. Units are degrees of rotation.

The maximum peak angle for an acceptable fastening cycle (required for all steps). If the actual angle exceeds this limit the fastening cycle will be flagged as NOK and the RED LED on the front panel and tool illuminates. Must be greater than Low Angle. Units are degrees of rotation.

High Angle

The minimum peak angle for an acceptable fastening cycle. If the achieved angle does not reach this limit the fastening cycle will be flagged as a NOK and the YELLOW LED on the front panel and tool illuminates. Must be less than High Angle. Units are degrees of rotation.

Low Angle

Angle Reset Resets the achieved angle value to zero if torque drops below Snug Torque during the step.

Yes will shutoff the tool when the High Torque parameter is exceeded during any Angle Control strategy. No will shutoff the tool when the Torque Bailout parameter is exceeded during any Angle Control strategy. Requires the Torque Bailout value to be set. Should be set equal to or above High Torque. Units are the selected torque units.

Bailout on High Torque

Torque Bailout The torque value at which the tool will shutoff during an Angle Control strategy if the tool has not reached target angle.

Yes will shutoff the tool when the High Angle parameter is exceeded during any Torque Control strategy. No will cause the tool to stop when the Angle Bailout parameter is exceeded during any Torque Control strategy. Requires the Angle Bailout value to be set. Should be set equal to or above High Angle. Units are degrees of rotation.

Bailout on High Angle

Angle Bailout The angle value at which the tool will shutoff during an Torque Control strategy if the tool has not reached target torque.

Provides a torque window during the rundown phase of the fastening cycle into which achieved torque must pass through. This window looks back from the Snug Torque of the step over the angle interval defined. If achieved torque is outside the window the fastening cycle is ended with the Shutoff Code of [T]. YES enables this monitor, NO disables this monitor. For implementation description see “10.5 Monitor Torque Window” on page 200.

Monitor Torque Window

Upper Torque Defines the high torque limit for the window.

Lower Torque Defines the low torque limit for the window.

Upper Angle Defines the low angle limit for the window referenced from when the Snug Torque value.

Lower Angle Defines the high angle limit for the window referenced from when the Snug Torque value.

Provides Torque Rate Monitoring during the step between a Rate Threshold to final torque of the step. AVERAGE will provide the average torque rate during the step. INSTANT will provide the instantaneous rate at the step target. Only available during Torque Control strategies. NO disables this monitoring. The shutoff code is RATE.

Monitor Torque Rate

Rate Threshold Defines the torque at which this monitoring begins

High Rate The maximum peak rate for an acceptable fastening cycle. If the actual rate exceeds this limit the fastening cycle will be flagged as NOK and the RED LED on the front panel and tool illuminates.

Low Rate The minimum peak rate for an acceptable fastening cycle. If the actual rate does not achieve this limit the fastening cycle will be flagged as NOK and the YELLOW LED on the front panel and tool illuminates.

Correlation coefficient for least square fit (straight line) of the torque rate curve. A higher number correlates to a straighter line. If any point exceeds the Deviation Limit the fastening cycle will be flagged as NOK and the RED and YELLOW LEDs on the front panel and tool illuminates.

Deviation Limit

The controller shuts off the tool if the achieved torque drops below the peak torque by a defined percentage. YES turns this monitoring on. NO turns this monitoring off.

Bailout on Torque Drop

Torque Drop The value, as a percentage of running peak torque, the torque must drop before the controller shuts off the tool.

Torque Threshold The torque at which this monitoring begins.

Filter The amount of angle the tool’s output must rotate where the torque drop must be maintained before the fastening cycle is ended with a shutoff code of TD.

Speed The velocity of the output of the tool before any Downshift Mode activates (required for any step). Units are RPM. Must be greater than 0. Default is 9999.

Acceleration The rate the tool ramps up to Speed in RPM/s (revolutions per minute per second). Should be greater than 1,000 RPM/s. The default is 3,000 RPM/s.

Selects the type of spindle inertia control toward the end of a fastening cycle.

Disabled Does not reduce the speed of the motor.

Reduces the tool speed to a specific value (Downshift Speed) at a specific rate (Deceleration) when a specific torque value (Downshift Torque) is reached during the fastening cycle. Speed units are RPM, deceleration units are RPM/sec, torque is in torque units.

Manual

Enables the Adaptive Tightening Control algorithm to slow the tool’s speed as the torque rises. The default values can be modified for when the algorithm starts (ATC Starting Torque), when it ends (ATC Ending Torque) and the tool speed after the algorithm ends (ATC Ending Speed). The torque units are a percent of Target Torque. The speed values are a percent of Speed.

Downshift Mode

Enables the Adaptive Tightening Control Plus algorithm to slow the tool’s speed based on a sampled torque rate. The default values can be modified for when the algorithm starts monitoring rate (Threshold Low), when it stops monitoring rate (Threshold High) and the tool speed after the algorithm ends (Minimum Speed). The torque units are a percent of Target Torque. The speed values are a percent of maximum speed of the tool.

Abort Timer Stops the tool when the time has elapsed from the start of the step. The value should be long enough to complete the fastening cycle during this step.

Delay Between Steps The time the tool delays before proceeding with the next step in the Task. Entered in seconds.

Power The maximum power available to the tool to perform the fastening cycle. Required for all steps. Units are percent of maximum rated torque of the tool. Should not be less than 100%.

High Current The maximum current for an acceptable fastening cycle. If the achieved tool current exceeds this limit the fastening cycle is flagged as NOK and the RED LED on the front panel and tool illuminates. Must be greater than Low Current. Units are percent.

Low Current The minimum current for an acceptable fastening cycle. If the actual tool current does not reach this limit the fastening cycle is flagged as a NOK and the YELLOW LED on the front panel and tool illuminates. Must be less than High Current. Units are percent.

This controls how the tool is turned off AFTER reaching target torque. This is designed as an ergonomic benefit to ease operator discomfort with direct-drive tools.

Soft Stop

If AUTO is selected the tool is dynamically controlled to a stop. If Yes is selected the tool’s current will be removed for the time specified in Current Off Time, then reapplied for the time specified in the Current Hold Time, then current will ramp to zero over the time specified in Current Ramp Time. Units are in seconds.

Max Torque Bailout Determines when to stop the tool based on exceeding a maximum torque value during the Angle Control/ Torque Averaging strategy. Units are the selected torque units.

Min Torque Bailout Determines when to stop the tool based on dropping below a minimum torque value during the Angle Control/ Torque Averaging strategy. Units are the selected torque units.

Torque Compensation Yes will use the average torque achieved during an Angle Control/ Torque Averaging strategy as the zero torque for ALL following steps.

Merge Torque Carries the torque over from one step to another as if the two steps were actually one step.

Rate Target The rising slope rate at which the controller shuts off the tool. Units are the selected torque units/degrees of rotation.

Yield Target The falling slope rate at which the controller shuts off the tool. Yield target is a percentage (0%-100%) of change (decreasing slope) from the peak rate. The falling slope rate units are the selected torque units/degrees of rotation.

Max Torque A combination of the High Torque and Bailout on High Torque parameters. Used in Angle Control Smart Steps only.

Position Target The number of degrees from Tool Zero Position where the controller will shut off the tool during a Position Control / Torque Monitor strategy after achieving Snug Torque.

Adds a Step to the selected Task.

Steps do not have to be added sequentially. A Step can be added before or after the one that is selected. Steps renumber automatically after being added. Make a selection and press OK to add a Step, or CANCEL to not add a Step.

Use the Up and Down arrow to select the option required then press the interactive OK button. STRATEGY creates a step using a strategy from the list above. Only Strategy steps can be assigned as audit steps. WOBBLE, SLOW SEEK, SELF TAP, PRE-TORQUE, BACKOUT and RELEASE selections create Smart Steps in their required order. Smart Steps cannot be audit steps. See section “3.1.1.1 Wizard Screens” on page 39 for a description of these Smart Steps.

Delete Deletes the selected Step from the Task. Steps cannot be recovered once deleted.

Copy Copies the selected Step to the Clipboard.

Paste Overwrites the selected Step with the values residing in the Clipboard. To copy/ move a Step: first create a new Step where it is needed, than copy the Step to be moved, then paste into the new Step created and delete the original if required.

Press the EXIT interactive menu button to save changes and return to the Run screen, See section “1.3 CE Directives (Europe)” on page 13. Press the CANCEL interactive menu button to return to the Task level. If using Alpha toolbox, ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Press the YES interactive menu button to save the changes and exit the programming mode. Press NO to discard the current changes and exit the programming mode. Press CANCEL to not exit the programming mode and continue modifying parameters.

This information is required when connecting the Alpha controller to an Ethernet network using the Ethernet port.

Yes allows the Alpha controller to receive an address from the network DHCP server. No requires the address parameters to be filled in manually.

IP Address The IP Address of the Alpha controller.

Obtain IP From Network

Network

Subnet Mask The Subnet address of the Alpha controller.

Gateway The Gateway address to a connecting network.

DNS The address of the network’s DNS server.

Physical This is the MAC id of the Ethernet port on the Alpha controller. This value comes from the Ethernet board inside and cannot be changed.

Use these parameters to setup the access point to connect QPM Cordless tools to the Expert, Specialist, or Network Node Alpha controllers. The access point may also be used to connect computers or other devices with browsers to Alpha Toolbox.

To enable wireless communications for the Expert, Specialist, or Network Node Alpha controllers, type in an SSID value, type in a PASSWORD and choose the applicable REGION.

Off - Disables the radio in the Network Node Alpha controller. Low - Enables the radio in the Network Node Alpha controller at a low power level. Medium - Enables the radio in the Network Node Alpha controller at a medium power level. High - Enables the radio in the Network Node Alpha controller at a high power level.

Radio

Name This parameter sets the Service Set Identifier (SSID) for the access point in the QPM Alpha controller. The maximum number of case sensitive, alphanumeric (ASCII) characters is 32. It is recommended to use a value that best defines the station under test from other stations. Use the up and down arrows on the keypad to insert characters. Use the right arrow to move the cursor for the next character. If left blank the default SSID for the QPM Alpha controller is QB- serialnumber, where serialnumber is the serial number of the controller; i.e. QB-032014007.

Security OPEN Enable OPEN wireless access point protocol, this mode is an encryption-free (open) mode.

WPA2 Enable WPA2 wireless security (encryption) protocol. An 8 character minimum length password is REQUIRED, and must follow the WPA2 security protcol password specification. If no password is entered, no wireless connections will be accepted.

Password This parameter sets the encryption key needed to connect a wireless device to the access point in the QPM Alpha controller. Must be a minimum of 8 characters and no longer than 63 printable characters or 64 hexadecimal digits. Use the up and down arrows on the keypad to insert characters. Use the right arrow to move the cursor for the next character. This parameter can be left blank unless a security protocol is selected.

Region Select from the drop-down list the region of the world where the tool is operating. This selects the correct frequency channels allowed by that region.

Press the PAIR interactive menu button, available on Expert, Specialist, and Network Node Controllers, to initiate the pairing mode to a QPM Cordless Tool. If there are unsaved changes, the changes must be saved before you can put the controller in pair mode. If you select “PAIR” with unsaved changes a popup message will display “CHANGES PENDING!”. The “PAIR” button will switch the access point to a pairing SSID while the Alpha controller is in pairing mode. To pair a QPM Cordless Tool after pressing the PAIR button ensure the QPM Cordless Tool is off by removing the battery pack and re-installing the battery pack. Wake the QPM Cordless Tool into pairing mode by pressing and holding the MFB and then tap the start trigger switch. Wait for the tone before releasing the MFB. The QPM Cordless Tool will find the wireless capable Alpha controller and request to be added as a trailing spindle by turning on, then off, the status lights in sequence. Accept the QPM Cordless Tool as a trailing spindle on the wireless capable Alpha Controllers. See Section “8.1 Connection” on page 174 to see how to accept the spindle as a trailing device. Press the BACK interactive menu button when the pairing operation is complete to return the access point to normal mode and the user defined SSID, otherwise use Alpha Toolbox. Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

The port performs both functions at the same time. Barcode: The port reads input from a barcode scanner and places it into the PART ID buffer. Data in the PART ID buffer is added to the fastening cycle data when stored and transmitted via a network protocol or printed. Print: A pre-defined data string is sent out the port after each fastening cycle that exceeds the Threshold Torque. See section “6.4 Serial Connector” on page 123 for string definitions.

BARCODE / PRINTER

Baudrate The data transmission rate in bits/second for communication.

Parity Used to determine if data was lost or compromised during transfer.

TOYOTA PI Connects this port to the Toyota PI box.

PFCS Connects this port to the Chrysler network.

OPEN Connects this port to a network using the OPEN protocol with serial messaging.

The internal PLC takes over communications on this port. Baud rate and Parity of the Serial port may be changed for PLC communications. Set these values according to the requirements of the end user.

Baudrate The data transmission rate in bits/second for communication.

Parity Used to determine if data was lost or compromised during transfer.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Choose which type of PFCS communications to be used.

BASIC This is the standard protocol used at Chrysler facilities.

BASIC NPL This is the enhanced protocol used at Fiat facilities. The controller is enabled by the network, performs many operations until disabled by the network.

SMART NPL This is the enhanced protocol used at Fiat facilities. The controller is enabled for a specific Job by the network, after successfully completing the job the controller disables itself.

Server IP Type the IP Address of the PFCS server on the network.

This port is used to send fastening cycle status and data to the PFS system. Enable or Disable this port as required. When enabled type the port number.

Port Number The required virtual port on which the Alpha will communicate to the plant network. Starts with 10,000.

Wait to Connect Time period in seconds between a disconnect and an attempt to reconnect.

Solicited Port

Wait for Data The time period in seconds where the controller waits for a reply to a request sent to the server.

Wait for ACK The time period to wait between when the controller sends data to the server and it should receive an acknowledgment. If no ACK in this time period the data sent again 3 times.

Keep Alive The time in seconds for an inactivity timeout between messages when the controller sends a KEEP ALIVE message to ensure cable integrity.

This port is used by the PFS system to select the Job number on the Alpha controller. Enable or Disable this port as required. When enabled type the port number.

Port Number The required virtual port on which the Alpha will communicate to the plant network. Must be a different port number than the Solicited Port.

Machine ID Required for Smart or Basic NPL. May be used for Basic PFCS. The Machine ID for the port.

Wait to Connect Time period in seconds between a disconnect and an attempt to reconnect.

Unsolicited Port

Wait for Data The time period in seconds where the controller waits for a reply to a request sent to the server.

Wait for ACK The time period to wait between when the controller sends data to the server and it should receive an acknowledgment. If no ACK in this time period the data sent again 3 times.

Keep Alive The time in seconds for an inactivity timeout between messages when the controller sends a KEEP ALIVE message to ensure cable integrity.

Use these setting when implementing the NPL protocol communications at Fiat facilities.

This is for batch processing and printer support. DISABLE: Batch process is disabled. NO MES: Perform the batch process and printer output without the MES command MES: Perform the batch process and printer output with the MES command.

Batch Mode

Operation Mode AUTO: Sends keep alive messages as necessary. MANUAL: Keep Alive messages are not sent.

Manual Messaging YES: Send data to the MES while in Manual Mode. NO: Do not send data to the MES while in Manual Mode.

NPL Settings

Buffer Size The size in characters to set aside to receive network messages. Maximum size is 4096 characters (bytes).

For Smart NPL only. Mode 1: NOKs are sent when they happen (TR) and in final message when the Job is complete (ER). Mode 2: NOKs are sent when they happen (TR) and sent in the final message only when the Job failed. OKs are send as ER when Job is complete and passes. Mode 3: All results are sent as they happen (TR). Final fastening cycle in Job is sent as ER.

Transfer Mode

There are OPTIONS which can be adjusted based on plant Systems requirements.

Rundown Data Specify the PART ID as VIN or AVI.

Options

Select YES to allow the controller to buffer the fastening cycle data while the controller is off line (disconnected from the network). NO means the controller will not buffer data for network retrieval.

Buffer While Offline

Change these parameter values as required by Systems department. Units are in seconds.

Wait to Connect Time period between a disconnect and an attempt to reconnect.

Wait for Data The time period where the controller waits for a reply to a request sent to the server.

Timers

Wait for ACK The time period to wait between when the controller sends data to the server and it should receive an acknowledgment. If no ACK in this time period the data sent again 3 times.

Keep Alive The time for an inactivity timeout between messages when the controller sends a KEEP ALIVE message to ensure cable integrity.

PFCS Version This is the installed version of the PFCS protocol. Check with the Chrysler’s Systems group to determine if this has been approved for use in the facility.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Port The required virtual port on which the Alpha will communicate to the plant network. Normally 4545.

Cell Type the cell number where this Alpha controller resides.

Yes causes the Alpha controller to buffer data for 100 fastening cycles when the server connection is lost. Upon reconnection, the buffered data transmits to the server. No does not buffer any data when the server connection is lost.

Buffer While Off Line

Send Fastener Removed Yes sends the FASTENER REMOVED message when the Alpha controller detects a tightened fastener is removed. No stops the message from transmitting.

Number of Tries This is the number of times the Alpha controller sends a message to the server when no ACK message is received.

Max Connections The maximum number of connections the Alpha controller allows the server. The Alpha cannot have more than 10 connections.

Wait for Ack The time in seconds to wait for an ACK before retransmitting information.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen, otherwise use ALpha Toolbox. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Server IP Type the IP Address of the Toolsnet server on the network.

Port The required virtual port on which to communicate this protocol. For the QB Alpha controller it is normally 6575.

System Type the cell number where this Alpha controller resides.

System Name Type the system number where this Alpha controller resides.

Station Type the Station number where this Alpha controller resides.

Station Name Type the Station name where this Alpha controller resides.

Selects the types of traces that are sent to the server.

None No traces are sent to the server.

All All traces are sent to the server.

Trace

OK Only OK fastening cycle traces are sent to the server.

NOK Only NOK fastening cycle traces are sent to the server.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Enable or Disable XML communications as required. Once enabled select the correct software and results server and ports.

Version Now supports version 2.0 and 2.1. Choose the correct one for the facility.

XML Communications

Results Server Type the IP Address of the Results Server on the network.

Results Port The virtual port on the XML protocol network server where the Alpha controller transmits messages.

Command Port The virtual port where the Alpha controller receives commands from the XML protocol network server.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen, otherwise use Alpha Toolbox. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

To set the DeviceNet network’s communication rate use the up/down arrows to select Baudrate. Press the Toggle button. Choices include: 125 K bits/s, 250 K bits/s and 500 K bits/s. Use the up/down arrows to choose the baud rate and press the OK interactive menu button. If no trailing devices are listed then they have to be added. They can be added in two different ways. They can be added manually using ADD function or automatically by using the SCAN function. Both functions are accessed with the MANAGE interactive menu button.

EDIT This edits the selected device that has already been added to the controller.

This adds a device for the to control. Set the options for the devices added in the Scanner dialog box.

Mac Id The Machine Id or Node number of the new device.

Connection The type of connection to the device. The QB Controller DeviceNet Scanner card supports Change of State, Polled, Cyclic and Bit Strobe.

Consumed Length The number of bytes consumed by the device.

Output The output address of the device for embedded PLC logic. Controller generated

Produced Length The number of bytes produced by the device.

Input The input address of the device for embedded PLC logic. Controller generated.

Delete This deletes the selected device from the controller’s DeviceNet network.

Import This imports a scanner.json file on the USB memory stick.

Scan Scans the DeviceNet network and adds any devices it finds to the controller. After adding the user must use EDIT to modify the options for the device.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

The Fieldbus tab is a generic term for any of the optional fieldbus types that can be added to the Expert, Specialist, or Advanced controllers and this tab appears only when one of those options are installed. These fieldbus allow the configurable Alpha controller to be added to end users’ compatible systems as trailing devices. The types of optional fieldbus are DeviceNet, EthernetIP, Profibus and Profinet. The type of fieldbus installed will be identified at the top of the screen.

Baudrate Sets the Alpha controller’s communication rate on the DeviceNet network. Choices include: 125 K bits/s, 250 K bits/s and 500 K bits/s.

Mac Id Sets the Alpha controller’s node number on the DeviceNet network.

The Fieldbus Configurable Alpha controllers automatically detects the type of communications controlled by the device in the connected network. The Alpha controller has no default I/O mapped on the DeviceNet bus. The I/O must be assigned before an EDS file can be obtained. See Section “2.8 Faults” on page 34 to assign and configure the DeviceNet I/O.

This information is required when connecting the Alpha controller to an EthernetIP network using the Ethernet/IP port.

Yes allows the Ethernet/IP board to receive an address from the network DHCP server. No requires the address parameters to be filled in manually.

IP Address The IP Address of the Ethernet/IP port.

Obtain IP From Network

Subnet Mask The Subnet address of the Alpha controller.

Ethernet/IP

Gateway The Gateway address to a connecting network. This value is required. If there is no actual gateway then type in the controller’s IP Address.

DNS The address of the network’s DNS server.

Physical This is the MAC id of the EthernetIP port on the Alpha controller. This value comes from the EthernetIP board inside and cannot be changed.

The Alpha controller has no default I/O mapped on the Ethernet/IP bus. The I/O must be assigned before an EDS file can be obtained. See Section “2.8 Faults” on page 34 to assign and configure the Ethernet/IP I/O.

This information is received when connecting the Alpha controller to PROFINET control device using its optional RJ-45 jack and cannot be modified.

PROFINET I/O Device

IP Address The IP Address of the Alpha controller’s Profinet port.

Subnet Mask The Subnet address of the Alpha controller’s Profinet port.

Gateway The Gateway address to a connecting network.

This is the name of given to the controller for lookup by the controlling PLC to determine the IP Address of the Profinet port on the Alpha controller. Valid device names are defined in the PROFIBUS standard, but in general must obey the following rules:

The device name can consist of one or more labels, each separated by a period (.). Each label consists of numbers and lower-case letters, and may have embedded hyphens (-). • Each label can be up to 63 characters long, and the total device name can be up to 240 characters long. The following examples are valid device names:

• rmc150e • rmc150e-1 • rmc150e-1.company.com

Physical This is the MAC id of the RJ45 jack on the Alpha controller. This value comes from the Ethernet board inside and cannot be changed.

The Alpha controller has no default I/O on the PROFINET bus. The I/O must be assigned before a GSD XML file can be obtained. See Section”2.8 Faults” on page 34 to assign and configure the PROFINET I/O. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Use the right/ left arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Sets the baud rate for the Alpha on the Profibus network. The choices are:

Baudrate

Auto The baud rate is determined automatically and set to the Network baud rate as determined by the Leading device.

Bus Address Sets the node number of the Alpha controller on the Profibus network. Values can be from 0 to 126.

Sets the compatibility mode of the Profibus card. The selections are Q, QA or QB. This provides the same identification to the PLC as if the QB controller is a Q or QA controller.

Compatibility

GSD Order Sets the order of the Inputs and Outputs as listed in the GSD file. Choices are Outputs First or Inputs First.

Determines whether or not the Alpha controller will automatically select which type of I/O modules to setup based on the assignable I/O created in section “2.8 Faults” on page 34. If NO is selected the user must enter the I/O modules manually.

Output Modules Type the number of modules desired. The modules will be created. User must select the number of BYTES or WORDS that make up each module and if it has consistency or not.

Automap

Input Modules Type the number of modules desired. The modules will be created. User must select the number of BYTES or WORDS that make up each module and if it has consistency or not.

If YES is selected the Alpha will create the I/O modules. User must select if Consistency is desired or not. NO will select without consistency, YES will select with consistency.

The Alpha controller has no default I/O on the Profibus bus. The I/O must be assigned before a GSD file can be obtained. See Section “2.8 Faults” on page 34 to assign and configure the Profibus I/O.

In Alpha Toolbox only. When YES is selected the Alpha controllers keypad cannot be used to edit any parameters. It will allow the user to navigate through the system and view any parameters. If the keypad is locked and it is desired for it to be unlocked one must connect to Alpha Toolbox on the controller and set this parameter to No. If set to NO the keypad on the Alpha controller can be used to edit parameters.

Lock Keypad

A name distinguishes this controller from other Alpha controllers on the same plant floor. Use the up/down arrows to type letters. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers. This is also the main Machine ID for PFCS protocol. This value will also be used to label any files exported via the USB port or Alpha Toolbox. There is a 15 character limit for this parameter.

During normal operation the keypad on the face of the controller can be used to select Jobs (Job Select) or Tasks (Task Select). It can also write a PART ID for storing with fastening cycle data or these functions can be disabled. If Job Select, Task Select or PART ID mode is enabled, simply type a number or letter on the keypad when on the run screen to select the Job, Task or Part ID, then press the Enter key.

Keypad Mode

Count Mode Choose Count Up to indicate the fasteners that have been completed OK. Choose Count Down to indicate the number of fasteners yet to be completed. This affects the count in the box on the run screen.

Choose OK to mark the fastening cycle as OK, even if the fastening cycle is stopped when the achieved torque and angle are within limits. Choose NOK to mark the fastening cycle as NOK when the fastening cycle is stopped and the achieved torque and angle values are within limits. When event occurs, this option illuminates the red and yellow LEDs on the tool and controller.

Stop within Limits

Yes enables the power saving mode for the QB Alpha controller or the Cordless Tool. No will turn off the power saving mode.

Sleep Timer Time in minutes from last operation when the power saving mode will turn off the controller’s screen or turn off the Cordless Tool. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 60, default value is 10.

Enable Sleep Timer

Running a tool, pressing a button or the touch screen, connecting with Alpha Toolbox, changing the state of I/O are all operations that will wake up the controller. Press the Start Trigger Switch on the Cordless Tool to recover from power saving mode.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Select the appropriate user from the drop-down and then type in the correct password for the selected user. The parameter value will be modified if the logged in user has sufficient privileges. Otherwise the controller will display the Insufficient Privileges screen and the parameter value will not be modified.

Press OK to acknowledge and try again or CANCEL the modifying operation. When a user is logged in the controller is unlocked at that user’s access level. The unlocked icon appears and the LOGOUT interactive menu button appears on the run screen.

The controller automatically re-locks the system 15 minutes after the last keypad input. Press the LOGOUT button to re-lock the controller when finished modifying parameters. When the controller is locked the lock icon appears, the LOGOUT button disappears and the controller is password protected. To add a user, press the MANAGE interactive menu button.

Adding users is a two step process. First add user by choosing option 1. Add:

Name user, enter password, enter password again to verify and press OK.

Second, manage the users access by selecting the new user.

Press the MANAGE interactive menu button and select option 4. Change Access. One user must be an Administrator. Administrator rights give a user full access to the controller. This enables all privileges including restoring factory defaults, deleting logs and adding users.

To assign the selected user as an Administrator choose Yes, for non-administrators choose NO, then press OK. Select the Access level for non-administrators.

Options include:

NONE denies access.

LOCAL allows access from the keypad.

REMOTE allows access from a computer via Alpha Toolbox.

BOTH allows access from the keypad and a computer.

There is no overlap between areas. Select more than one area for access if required.

Setup Users at this level can modify all parameters in the Job area. They may also modify parameters in the Other area except in the Users, Tool and Stats tabs.

Tool Users at this level can modify parameters under the Tool tab in the Other area, as well as set Preventive Maintenance Threshold and reset the PM and Cycle counters in the SERVICE menu.

Diagnostics Users at this level can force Inputs or Outputs ON or OFF and REMOVE forces in the I/O tab of ANALYZE.

Statistics Users at this level can modify parameters under the Stats tab in the Other area.

Communications Users at this level can modify all parameters in the Communications area.

Press OK to save. To delete a user press the MANAGE button and select option 2. Delete. Confirm deletion by pressing OK. This action requires the Administrator password; once entered, user is deleted. Import – Users can be entered from a backup file. Connect a USB memory stick to the USB port, scroll to desired file and press IMPORT. The new users display on the User list. Export – To backup Users, connect a USB memory stick to the USB port, name the file, then press SAVE. Press OK to save. Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Highlight function to assign to the selected pin and press the NEXT button. An Output functions can be assigned to more than one pin. The selected Output function must then be configured. See section “6.12.2 Output Descriptions” on page 138

for configuration options and descriptions. After modifying press FINISH.

The selected Input function must then be configured. See section “6.12.1 Input Descriptions” on page 132 for configuration options and descriptions. After modifying press FINISH.

The selected Input function must then be configured. See section “6.12.1 Input Descriptions” on page 132 or “6.12.2 Output Descriptions” on page 138 for configuration options and descriptions. Each fieldbus function has its own unique configuration parameters. After modifying press FINISH.

If this is the first one bit wide function added to the bus then an entire byte will be added with the remaining bits assigned as IGNORED or NOT USED. These functions will have a bit length of 7 to fill out the byte.

To continue adding functions choose the next bit that is IGNORED or NOT USED and press the Toggle button. Each time a function is added the IGNORED or NOT USED functions will decrease their bit length until all bits in a byte are used then a new byte will be added with the next function addition. If any byte, word or double word length function is assigned it must be assigned at bit 0 or bit 8. To insert a new byte to assign these types of functions press the MANAGE button and choose Add.

If the highlight is on an IGNORED or NOT USED or last bit of a byte the Add After Selection window appears. If the highlight is on bit 0 the Add Before Selection window appears. If the highlight is on a bit in the middle of a byte the Can’t Add! window appears. Press the OK button after one of these windows appears.

The new byte will be added either before or after the highlighted byte. Be sure to highlight the correct part of the byte before adding a new byte where required.

Select the desired function and press the NEXT button. Modify the configuration settings then press the FINISH button. A new byte, word or double word will be added to match the length of the new function.

Modifies the highlighted function. To edit a function or its configuration, highlight the function then press the MANAGE button. Then choose Edit. Choose the same function or a different one then press the NEXT button. Modify the configuration for the function then press the FINISH button.

Add Adds a new byte, word or double word and function to the selected bus.

Delete Deletes the highlighted byte, word, double word and function from the bus.

Import Imports an I/O file from a memory stick on the USB port. This will overwrite all I/O information on all buses.

Export Exports all I/O on all buses to a file on a memory stick on the USB port.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 52.

Tap Action Defines the operation when the MFB on the tool is tapped (pressed quickly).

Hold Action Defines the operation when the MFB on the tool is held for one second.

Defines which input starts the tool. In all cases, the 24V DC Start input is always available to start the tool.

Any Either the tool trigger or tool push-to-start switch starts the tool.

Start Mode

All Requires that both the tool trigger and the tool push-to-start switch must be activated to start the tool.

Lever Only the trigger on the tool starts the tool.

PTS Only the push-to-start switch on the tool starts the tool.

None Neither the tool trigger nor the tool push-to-start switch starts the tool.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 52.

Lights (1, 2) Defines whether the lights indicate a Job or Task.

Headlight Timer Sets the time the tool’s headlights remain on, in seconds, after the trigger is pressed.

Yes enables the timer and the tool’s Red, Green and Yellow status lights will illuminate for the period of time specified after a fastening cycle and then extinguish. If No is selected the time is disabled and the tool’s Red, Green and Yellow status lights will remain illuminated after a fastening cycle until the tool is started again. They will only extinguish while the tool is running.

Enable Tool Light Timer

Tool Light Timer The time in seconds the Red, Green and Yellow status lights will remain on after a fastening cycle.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 52.

The PLAY Button when pressed will preview the selected tone. A tool needs to be connected to the controller to perform this action. The STOP button will end the preview. Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 52.

PM Limit When the PM Counter in the tool exceeds this threshold, the preventive maintenance indicator on the front panel illuminates indicating it is time to perform maintenance on the attached tool.

Temperature Limit Identifies the threshold, in degrees Celsius, for tool shut off. This is caused by excessive duty cycle on the tool.

Torsion Factor See Appendix A – Torsion Compensation for an explanation of this parameter and how to determine a correct value. Otherwise, use the default (zero).

Requires Arming Forces the Tap Action on the MFB to Arm. See section “5.2.5 MFB Mode” on page 117. Tubenut tools require arming as a factory setting.

Dog Torque Sets the torque level at which the tubenut stops when it returns home. The value is a percentage of the rated torque of the tool; where 0.1 = 10%.

Home Speed Sets the speed of the tubenut tool when it returns home.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 52.

Display Sets the default screen under statistical analysis in the ANALYZE area.

Population Sets the number of fastening cycles included in statistical analysis.

Subgroup Size Sets the size of the subgroups for the population.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 52.

Language Selects the language for the controller screens and files.

Date Format Selects the Date format for the controller.

24-Hour Time Selects the 12 hour or 24 hour clock.

Time Zone Selects the time zone for the controller referenced to GMT (Greenwich Mean Time).

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 52.

Daylight Saving Time Modifies the controller time by the appropriate amount.

Time Sets the controller time.

Date Sets the controller date.

Press the SYNC interactive button in Alpha Toolbox to set the controller to the connected computer’s date and time. Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 52.

Ladder logic for the embedded PLC can be created or edited using Alpha Toolbox. See section “PLC Editor” on page 157. Use the left arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 52.

Press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 52.

In this area the user can view information about the tool and controller, reset tool counters, adjust tool calibration values and upgrade the firmware in the controller and tool. Users must have TOOL or ADMINISTRATOR access level to modify parameters.

Odometer – Cannot be reset. Indicates the total number of OK Fastening cycles the attached tool has performed over its lifetime. PM Counter – Causes the preventive maintenance indicator to illuminate (on front panel and tool) when this value exceeds the PM Threshold. Trip Counter – Counts the number of OK fastening cycles between resets. Use the RESET interactive menu button to reset (back to zero) either the PM Counter or the Trip Counter.

Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Nominal Cal This is a calculated value based on the torque output of the motor, the gear ratios and efficiencies. This is a reference value only and cannot be modified.

Choose which transducer will be used as the primary transducer for control and data collection. This parameter is only available when a tool with a redundant transducer is attached.

Primary Transducer

Torque Cal This is the specific torque calibration value for the tool. Enter a new value after performing a lab certification. The Torque Cal should not deviate from the Nominal Cal value by more than 20%.

ENABLE or DISABLE the redundant transducer to check the primary transducer’s operation. This parameter is only available when a tool with a redundant transducer is attached. When enabled the controller compares the redundant transducer’s signal to the primary transducer’s signal continuously, even at rest. If the difference in the values exceeds the Tolerance the controller stops the tool with a shutoff code of T1 ≠T2. To calibrate a tool with a redundant transducer, first disable the redundant transducer and select T1 as the Primary Transducer. Calibrate the tool normally. Then select T2 as the Primary Transducer and calibrate the tool normally. Enable the redundant transducer if required. Choose the correct Primary Transducer.

Redundant Transducer

This is the specific tolerance value for the redundant transducer to check against the primary transducer. Units are percentage of Max Torque of the tool. This parameter is only available when a tool with a redundant transducer is attached.

Tolerance

ENABLE or DISABLE the redundant angle sensor to check the primary angle sensor’s operation. This parameter is only available when a tool with a redundant transducer is attached. When enabled the controller compares the redundant angle sensor’s signal to the primary angle snesor’s signal continuously, even at rest. If the difference in the values exceeds the Tolerance the controller stops the tool with a shutoff code of A1 ≠A2.

Redundant Angle

Tolerance This is the specific tolerance value for the redundant angle sensor to check against the primary angle sensor. Units are defrees of rotation of the tool.

Modified A value that is changed by the controller to indicate the date and time the tool was last calibrated.

Press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

Press the EXIT interactive menu button when finished. The About Tab changes to add information about the optional fieldbus card installed such as DeviceNet, Profibus, ProfiNet or Ethernet/IP.

turn on the controller. After the controller starts, it checks that the file is complete and written to permanent memory. The controller auto-reboots. When the run screen appears, the controller is updated and ready. During the file transfer process, a file error can cause the transfer to abort and the error message appears. Contact your STANLEY representative if this happens. The “Invalid File” screen appears if the update file is for a different controller. Contact your STANLEY representative if this happens. Trailing controllers and QPM Cordless Tools that are connected to the Alpha Controller may also be updated this way by simply choosing the spindle before selecting SERVICE > CONTROLLER. It is advised to update trailing controllers and B-Series QPM Cordless Tools before updating the lead controller. Press EXIT when finished.

Analyze displays tool and controller diagnostic information, traces and I/O status. Press the ANALYZE button to perform diagnostics on the controller, tool or I/O, look at fastening cycle traces, perform Statistical Process Control analysis, or to download error log data.

Transducer Health – The thickness of the vertical line within the horizontal bar indicates transducer health (a thicker line means less healthy). Once the line reaches the tick mark, on either side of center, the transducer needs to be replaced.

Transducer Torque – Provides a live transducer torque value during the Fastening cycle. Transducer Current – The transducer is powered with a constant current value. This current should be present and not varying. See section “2.8 Faults” on page 34 for limits.

Controller DC Bus voltage – The bus should always be approximately 320V DC. Controller AC Supply Voltage/Frequency – See section “1.6.2 Electric Service Ratings” on page 20 for controller AC volts specification.

Tool Temperature – Indicates instantaneous temperature of the tool’s stator windings. Temperature is not measured during tool operation. This interacts with the Temperature Limit parameter. See section “3.1.4.7 Tool Tab” on page 82.

Tool Output Angle – Identifies the number of circular degrees of rotation on the tool output. Resets at each start.

Tool Output Speed – Identifies the real time speed of the tool output. The IDENTIFY interactive menu button will flash the red, yellow and green status lights on the selected tool and controller to distinguish it from another.

The Identify Spindle dialog box will appear when identifying is active. Press the OK interactive menu button to clear and stop the flashing lights. Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60. If using Alpha Toolbox, simply select the desired Tab to edit in the expanded list along the left edge of the browser and ensure that you “Save Changes” as described in section “4 Alpha Toolbox” on page 95.

This tab plots a torque verses time curve after every fastening cycle. The Y-axis is auto-scaled from 0 to maximum torque of the data. The X-axis has a variable scale to include the entire fastening cycle. Use the TORQUE interactive menu button to choose how to view the trace.

Torque – Displays Torque vs. Time. Angle – Displays Angle vs. Time. Torque/Angle – Displays Torque vs. Angle. Speed – Displays Speed vs. Time. Torque Rate – Displays the Torque Rate vs. Time. Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60.

Alpha controllers maintain both sample and population statistics. Sample statistics are calculated using the last

completed subgroup of fastening cycles for a given Task. The subgroup size is set using Subgroup Size. Population statistics are calculated using all of the fastening cycles for a given Task up to the population. To be included in sample or population statistics, a rundown must exceed the Task’s Threshold Torque and Statistical Torque and the fastening cycle must not be marked as a STOP or ABORT shutoff code. The statistics are calculated for Torque and Angle. Data is filtered by Task. Press the

interactive menu button and choose the Job and Task under analysis.

Values are recalculated each time a tab is selected.

– Displays the number of fastening cycles that exceeded the high limit. n

– Displays the number of fastening cycles that did not achieve the low limit. n Abr – Displays the number of fastening cycles that were aborted. n Stp – Shows the number of fastening cycles that were stopped. R – Shows the subgroup range (highest minus lowest value).

– Identifies the highest value of all the fastening cycles in the population

– Identifies the lowest value of all the fastening cycles in the population The Display parameter under Setup/Other/STATS tab determines which of the following sections are displayed after the Results.

The details provide the Date and Time the event occurred. Source – Shows where the user changed the values. Controller indicates the keypad was used, aTB means the Alpha Toolbox was used. Details – Shows which part of the controller the changes were made. Press the BACK interactive menu button to return the LOG screen. Press the MANAGE interactive menu button to export Log Data to the USB memory stick or to clear the event log. Connect a USB memory stick to the USB port on the bottom of the Alpha controller. Use the up/down arrows and/ or the numeric keypad to select option.

Use the up/down arrows and/or the numeric keypad to type a file name. Pressing the OK interactive menu button saves the data to the USB memory stick.

After the file is saved, press the OK button to return to the LOG screen. Press the MANAGE interactive menu button to clear the data. Press OK to clear the data or press CANCEL to return to the LOG screen.

Press YES to clear the data, NO to return to the LOG screen. Use the right arrow to move to the next tab or press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60.

• Internal Fault- Please contact a STANLEY service team member. • Time Changed- The internal spindle clock time or date was modified and saved. • PM Counter Reset- The preventative maintenance counter was rest to zero. • Trip Counter Reset- The trip counter was reset to zero. • Unknown- The event error was not recognized, most likely due to mismatched software between Alpha Toolbox, lead spindle, and trailing spindles.

• Controller- The controller was the source that made a parameter change. • Lead- The lead controller was the source that issued the event about a trailing spindle. • Alpha Toolbox- Alpha Toolbox was the source that made a parameter change. • Servo- The controller was the source that issued the event/ fault. • Tool- The tool was the source that issued the event/ fault. • Username- The user logged in at the time of a parameter change.

• SP#- The spindle number the event occurred. • Asserted- The event or fault became active. • Cleared- The event or fault was cleared. • Spindle Network- Spindle network or list of spindles are modified • Ethernet Cable Connected- Ethernet port communication started

Each 24V DC connector pin is represented. Pin A is for supplying 24V DC to the I/O functions. Pin V is the 24VDC Return to complete the current loop. Pin B is the bus for the Outputs. See section “6.11 Input and Output Connector” on page 126 for a schematic. Pins L through U are for Inputs. Pins C through K are for Outputs. See section “3.1.4.3 I/O Tab” on page 78 to assign functions to the pins. A clear Input or Output pin icon identifies it as OFF; a green Input or Output pin icon identifies it as ON. There is a square cursor around the active pin; Use the Left/Right and Up/Down arrow keys to move the cursor. The text at the screen’s bottom left corner indicates the active pin’s assigned function. Manually control the I/O by forcing pins either ON or OFF. Applying force means the pin will always be in that forced state and does not toggle to the opposite state (even if the system requires it to toggle). This is useful for troubleshooting signals that integrate with other equipment.

Move the horizontal bar/cursor under a pin and press the ON interactive menu button to force it on, press the OFF interactive menu button again to force it off. When the force is no longer required, press the REMOVE button to remove the force and return the pin to system control. When forcing I/O changes during operation, the system provides a warning first.

A clear pin icon with a small F indicates the pin is forced OFF. A green pin icon with a small F indicates the pin is forced ON.

If a force is active when the EXIT button is pressed a prompt appears.

Choose the YES interactive menu button to remove the force(s) and return to the run screen. Choosing the NO interactive menu button does NOT remove the force(s), it returns to the run screen. The system runs with forces applied until they are removed or until the controller’s next power cycle. Press EXIT to save the changes and return to the Run screen. See section “3.1.2.6 Exit” on page 60.

Each Alpha Controller has an Alpha Toolbox port for the purposes of local configuration, backup of parameters and data, restoring parameters and performing updates. The Alpha Toolbox port on the leading spindle provides access to all spindles if in a multiple spindle configuration. The Alpha Toolbox port is not used on a network. If configuration and data collection over an Ethernet network is required the normal Network port, and its IP Address, is used.

The Alpha Toolbox port provides an easy connection with a computer. It has a DHCP server and a DNS server built in. The controller has its own private IP Address and will provide a private IP Address to the computer to create its own network. Knowledge of the IP Address is not required.

Connect a computer to the Alpha Toolbox port using a standard Cat 5, 5e, 6, 6a, etc. Ethernet cable terminated with RJ45 connectors. It does not matter if the cable is straight-through or crossover. The computer’s Ethernet port must be set to DHCP rather than a static IP Address. Observe the computer’s notifications to determine when the controller has provided the IP Address. Open a web browser, any current browser will do, and type http://ATB. QPM into the uniform resource locator bar. The controller’s web server will provide the Alpha Toolbox screens and controls.

The menus on the left coincide with the interactive menu buttons on the controller’s run screen. See section “3 Programming” on page 38 for descriptions on these menu items. The controller display windows on the right mimic the controller run screen. See section “2.7 Display” on page 27 for a description of the items on these windows. Normally only one window is displayed. When connected to a leading controller on a multiple spindle system all the spindles’ windows will appear on the Alpha Toolbox

run screen with a scroll bar, if necessary, to view them all. The controller display windows are dynamic, rather than static, and indicate the status of the fastening cycle. They will turn green for an OK fastening cycle and red for a NOK fastening cycle for one second then return to normal. A red box will cover the display if there is a fault until the fault is cleared.

A yellow box will cover the display if there is a message until the condition is cleared.

The active spindle number is displayed in the upper right hand corner and the controller display window for the active spindle will be a darker color than the others.

To switch between spindles click on the controller display window for the desired spindle. Once a spindle is selected it becomes the active spindle and all menu items on the left belong to the active spindle.

The black bar at the top of the Alpha Toolbox screen provides a navigation button as well as area appropriate buttons. Underneath the black bar on the left are the controls for the area. The Add, Delete, Copy, Paste buttons are the same as the MANAGE interactive menu button on the controller for each particular area. The windows below that are the tabs that correspond to each area. The area on the right displays the parameters for each area. See section “3 Programming” on page 38 for descriptions on these menu items and parameters and how to

use them.

The Home button brings up the Alpha Toolbox run screen. Any others such as

will send the user back one screen.

The Print button will use a printer attached to the computer to print a parameters report for the selected area. If in the Trace area it will print a picture of the trace.

The Import button w ill display the computer’s browse window. Browse to the file required and press open to import a previously saved (Exported) JSON file. When the file has finished importing the “Imported complete” window displays and the parameters are immediately overwritten. Click the OK button to close.

It is important to understand that the JSON files are specific to a controller area. If the Import button is clicked while in the Jobs area the imported file must be a Jobs.json file. If a different file, such as an IO.json file, is imported the file will delete all jobs currently in the controller since there is no Jobs information in the IO file. There is no recovery other than importing the correct file for the active area.

The Export button will download the JSON file for the active area to the computer. Be sure to understand the browser setting to know where the file is saved. These files are different from the Backup file. They contain the parameters from the active area only. They cannot be used in the Restore function.

Drill down through the menus to get to the parameter of interest. While viewing parameters the font is black in color and the background for the value box is light grey.

When the parameter is clicked once the screen is selected for editing and the background for the value box turns white.

Type the required value into the box.

When finished entering the value press the computer’s Enter or Tab keys to set the value. The “Save Changes” dialog box opens. Click Apply to save the changes to the controller. Click Cancel to discard the changes.

It is a good idea to capture the stored parameters and data on a regular basis to analyze and understand the application.

Click on the Backup menu. The params.json file is immediately transferred to the computer. Be sure to understand the browser setting to know where the file is saved.

Click on the Rundowns menu. The rundowns.csv file is immediately transferred to the computer. Be sure to understand the browser setting to know where the file is saved.

The CSV file has headings for all of the columns that are obvious with the exception of column A “ID” and column G “SOC”. The ID column header will have numbers in front of the words ID. The syntax is n:Next_Rundown_Number[space] ID. The column contains unique numbers for each fastening cycle. When the controller is defaulted this value starts at 0 and runs to 4 billion before starting at 0 again. SOC is short for Shutoff Code. This column will contain numbers representing the reason the tool shutoff. Here

are the values for the numbers, see section “2.7.7.2 Shutoff Codes” on page 32 for a description:

1 = ”TORQUE” 2 = ”ANGLE” 3 = ”TORQUE/ ANGLE” 4 = ”CURRENT” 5 = ”TORQUE BAILOUT” 6 = ANGLE BAILOUT” 7 = ”MINIMUM TORQUE BAILOUT” 16 = ”RATE MONITOR” 32 = ”YIELD MONITOR” 128 = "TIME" 129 = "STOP" 130 = ">115%" 131 = "FAULT" 132 = "STALL" 133 = "CAN" 134 = "SYNC" 135 = "T1≠T2" 136 = "TD" 137 = "YIELD" 138 = "[T]" 139 = “Rate” 140 = “I” 141 = “A1≠A2 This same file can be saved to a USB memory stick from the controller’s USB port.

The Alpha controllers stores resultant audit data for 30,000 fastening cycles on a first in/ first out basis. Click on the Analyze>Trace menu from the Home screen in Alpha Toolbox.

Select the Rundowns button to display the rundowns.

A list of rundowns appears on the left. Click on the rundown that corresponds to the trace to be retrieved. The selected rundown turns blue.

Click on the Export button and the trace#.csv file will download to the computer. Be sure to understand the browser setting to know where the file is saved. The file will be numbered (#) with the unique rundown ID number to distinguish it from the rest and so it can be correlated with the record in the rundowns.csv file.

Point Details button displays details about a point on the trace graph where the mouse is hovering.

Rundown – Indicates the unique number for the fastening cycle. Date – The date the fastening cycle occurred. Time – The time the fastening cycle occurred. Job – The Job in which the fastening cycle occurred.

Task – The Task in which the fastening cycle occurred. Status – Overall status of the fastening cycle. Job Count – The working bolt of the Job during this fastening cycle. Task Count - The working bolt of the Task during this fastening cycle. Tool Model – The model number of the tool performing the fastening cycle. Tool Serial – The serial number of the tool performing the fastening cycle. Tool Temperature – The temperature of the tool at the tool shutoff. Steps – The steps performed during the fastening cycle. The step’s strategy type, peak Torque, Current, Angle, Torque Rate and Deviation achieved during the step is displayed. The audit step is indicated by blue font. Smart Steps are indicated by name rather than by strategy type. Click on the step name and the graph on the right will highlight that individual step.

Time – The time in milliseconds the point occurred in the fastening cycle from start. Torque – The torque achieved at the mouse hover point. Angle – The angle achieved at the mouse hover point. Speed Command – The commanded speed at the mouse hover point. Speed – The actual tool speed achieved at the mouse hover point. Bus Voltage – The actual DC Bus voltage achieved at the mouse hover point. Current Command – The commanded current at the mouse hover point. Current – The actual tool current achieved at the mouse hover point. Torque Rate – The actual torque rate achieved at the mouse hover point. This values is derived by using the Torque Rate algorithm associated with the parameters Torque Average (ms) and Angle Interval.

If no physical printer is attached, choose an installed PDF printer to save as a PDF file.

cycles are received. When the user navigates away from the Trace screen the imported files are removed from the list.

Y1 Axis Selector

Y2 Axis Selector

Preset Selector

Graph

The Y axes field selectors are at the top of each axis. The X axis field selector is at the bottom center of the screen. An axes presets selector is at the top center of the screen. Data for the trace is collected every millisecond from start to finish of the fastening cycle. Once the number of data points exceeds ~2000 the graph is automatically scaled between event points for graph and file manageability while ensuring a high resolution around the event points. Event points are things such as Threshold Exceeded, ATC Active and Control Point (target achieved). The X axis zero point for Time is when the achieved torque reaches or exceeds Task’s Threshold Torque value. The

X axis zero point for Angle is when the achieved torque reaches or exceeds the audit step’s Snug Torque value. Time and Angle values between start and the zero point are negative. The Master Detail icon arrow in the bottom right corner of the screen allows the user to zoon in on a graph.

Click the icon to open the Master Detail window.

Slide the left arrow bubble to the right or the right arrow bubble to the left to change the screen zoom. The graph window will follow and display only the area indicated in white.

Hover the mouse over the zoomed, white to change the mouse cursor to four arrows. Click and drag the white area to move the zoom to different areas of the graph.

Double click the zoomed, white area to return the graph to normal. Click the arrow in the bottom right corner of the Master Detail to reduce the window to its icon.

values change in the point information box.

The zero point of the X axis of Time for each graph in overlay view is the programmed Threshold Torque. Change the X axis from Time to Angle and the zero point changes to the programmed Snug Torque. Selected and locked fastening cycles will move down the list as new ones come into the list. Use the scroll bar to view or unlock older traces.

The Alpha controller will allow only one user to edit parameters at any one time. However, it will allow multiple users to view the contents of the controller at any one time. There are icons on the bottom of the Alpha Toolbox screen to indicate user status.

Locked

Unlocked

Other User Editing

Wireless is Active

While viewing parameters in Alpha Toolbox the Locked icon will appear in the botom of the Screen. When the user begins to edit any parameter the Locked icon changes to an Unlocked icon. Alpha Toolbox supports user security. If users are programmed into the controller the user must have Remote rights to make edits using Alpha Toolbox. If user1 is editing parameters, the Locked icon and the Other User Editing icon will appear for user2. The controller supports 5 simultaneous Alpha Toolbox connections. These same icons and their behaviors are mimicked on the controller display so the local user can see when a remote user is editing and vice versa. The zero point of the X axis of Time for each graph in overlay view is the programmed Threshold Torque. Change the X axis from Time to Angle and the zero point changes to the programmed Snug Torque. Selected and locked fastening cycles will move down the list as new ones come into the list. Use the scroll bar to view or unlock older traces.

This chapter promotes proper and safe use and gives guidance to owners, employers, supervisors and others responsible for training and safe use by operators. DC electric tools from STANLEY Assembly Technologies are intended for use in industrial threaded fastening or precision position and or adjustment applications only. Some instructions may not apply to all tools. Please contact your STANLEY Sales Engineer for information or assistance on STANLEY training for assembly tool operation.

Operating Conditions Temperature 32 to 122 ºF (0 to +50 ºC)

Humidity 0 to 95 % non-condensing

Noise Level: A-weighted emission sound pressure level at the work station < 70dBA (ref 20μPa) as determined according to ISO 15744-2002. Vibration Level: Weighted root mean square acceleration value at the handle < 2.5 m/s2 as determined according to ISO 8662. STANLEY ASSEMBLY TECHNOLOGIES hereby declares the following sound and vibration emission levels as required by the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC. A-weighted emission sound pressure level at the work station LpA (ref 20µPa) of < 70dBA. Value determined according to ISO 15744‑2002 * using as basic standards ISO 3744 and ISO 11203. Weighted emission root mean square acceleration level at the handle. Value determined according to ISO 8662 * (single axis) of < 2.5 m/s². * Operating conditions for all measurements: full rated speed, no load, rated supply voltage or pressure. A-weighted emission sound power level LWA: not required, declared sound pressure emission levels are below 85dBA. C-weighted peak emission sound pressure level LpCpeak: not applicable to these products. Uncertainty KpA, KWA, KpCpeak: not relevant, declared levels are maximum values.

are exposed to. The actual sound level an individual is exposed to and the individual’s exposure time over the work day are important factors in determining hearing protection requirements. Worker sound level exposure can only be determined at the job site and is the responsibility of tool owners and employers. Measure worker sound level exposure and identify high-risk noise areas where hearing protection is required. Follow federal (OSHA), state or local sound level statues, ordinances and or regulations.

Turn the controllers off when removing or attaching tools. STANLEY electric tools must be connected to a controller to operate. To ensure superior performance and safe operation, use a STANLEY controller specifically designed for each tool. These instructions are specific to STANLEY electric tools when used with STANLEY electric tool controllers and accessories. Some features may not be applicable, performance may be degraded and some safety systems may not be available when tools are connected to non-STANLEY controllers and accessories.

To install an accessory or bit , fully insert the accessory. The accessory is locked into place. To remove an accessory, pull the chuck collar away from the front of the tool. Remove the accessory.

Remove power before changing accessories. To install an accessory on the square drive, align the hole in the side of the accessory with the detent pin on the anvil square drive. Press the accessory on until the detent pin engages in the hole. Depression of detent pin may be necessary to aid installation of the accessory. To remove an accessory, depress the detent pin through the hole and pull the accessory off.

To ensure superior performance and safe operation, use the STANLEY cables specifically designed to operate these tools. Never use a tool with a damaged cable. Never abuse a cable, carry a tool by its cable or pull a cable to disconnect it. Also, keep the cord away from heat, sharp edges, or moving parts. Use cables of appropriate length (60M maximum) for each application; position and or suspend them in such a way as to prevent tripping and cable damage, and to provide good work area maneuverability.

Odometer Counter Records the total number of fastening cycle the tool has completed during its lifetime.

Trip Counter Records the number of fastening cycles the tool completed since the last reset to zero.

PM Counter Records the number of fastening cycles the tool completed since the last reset to zero. Interacts with PM Threshold.

PM Threshold A static value set by the end user. When the PM Counter exceeds the PM Threshold (Limit), the controller provides a maintenance alert. The alert is an orange indicator on the front of the controller and on the tool.

The controller reads the fastening cycle counters from the tool on each power up.

Green Tightened to specified limits The Fastening cycle meets all of the specified parameters.

Yellow Low torque or angle The Fastening cycle was rejected for not achieving either low torque or low angle.

Red High torque or angle The Fastening cycle was rejected for exceeding either high torque or high angle.

All lights Reverse The next time the start trigger is engaged the tool will remove the fastener.

Disable The button does nothing.

Pressing the button toggles between assembly and disassembly and illuminates the appropriate blue light [ 1 ] or [ 2 ]. All tool status lights [ 3 ] and [ 7 ] flash when the tool is in disassembly mode.

Reverse (Disassembly)

Job/Task Select Pressing the button toggles between Job/Task 1 and Job/Task 2 and illuminates the appropriate orange light [ 6 ] or [ 4 ].

Arm Pressing the button arms (activates) the trigger but does not start the tool. The blue assembly light [ 2 ] comes on to show that the tool is armed for three seconds.

Reset Reject This function, when selected, will cause the tool to disable after a NOK Fastening cycle. The Reject Tone, when enabled, will sound. Pressing the button re-enables the tool indicating the operator acknowledges the rejected Fastening cycle and wishes to repair it.

Job Reset Pressing the button causes the selected Job to be reset. This means that the fastener count is reset and the tool, if disabled due to Error Proofing requirements, re-enables.

This function, when selected, causes the tool to disable after a NOK Fastening cycle. The Reject Tone, when enabled, will sound. Pressing the button re-enables the tool in the Reverse direction and indicates that the operator acknowledges the rejected Fastening cycle and wishes to repair it. The tool switches to the forward direction after the controller detects a fastener has been removed.

Reset and Reverse

surface limit is 85°C.) Since the default limit is 85°C inside the tool regardless of ambient, no external surface can exceed this value no matter what the ambient temperature. STANLEY allows the temperature limit adjustment to provide flexibility to the professional user. Once a customer changes the setting from the factory default, it is their responsibility to ensure the safety of the user. Controller parameter settings can have a significant effect on tool operating temperatures.

The Alpha controllers can be setup to change tightening Jobs or Tasks from the tool’s MFB.

Exposed gear socket tools are designed to fit into tight spaces where other tools do not fit. These tools have exposed gears or ratchet teeth. It is recommended to use the MFB ARMING feature for these types of tools

Tubenut nutrunners are used for installing tube fittings.

Each Alpha Controller has a different combination of connectors. These connectors serve several purposes, such as: • Power • Tool Connections • Discrete inputs and outputs • Communications ports • Fieldbus ports

Alpha Controllers use an IEC 60320 style connector. The power source connector for the power cord is based on customer requirements. The power cord should be rated at either 15A/125V for 115V AC or 10A/250V for 230V AC power connections.

30-pin Tool Connector

30-pin Tool Connector

The USB connector is used for data transfer between a USB memory stick and the controller, controller upgrades and for receiving PART ID ASCII data from a USB barcode scanner. No mounting or unmounting of the memory stick is required. Simply insert a USB memory stick when requested and remove after the operation is complete. Do not energize the controller with a USB memory stick installed.

The barcode input monitors inter-character timing. When there is a 500 msec gap between characters, a complete barcode is assumed. When received, the controller logs it with all fastening cycles until another barcode is received or until the controller power is cycled. If the incoming barcode is longer than 32 characters, then the last 32 characters received are used.

Alpha controllers have one male DB-9 connector. The setup is 9600-baud rate, 8 data bits, No Parity and 1 Stop bit, and is not programmable except with the PLC. The connection between a device such as a computer and the controller is a null-modem cable. Communication functions can be selected for the serial port. See section “3.1.3.3 Serial Tab” on page 63.

DB-9 Connector Pins

Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function

1 Carrier Detect 4 Data Terminal Ready 7 Request to Send

2 Receive Data 5 Signal Ground 8 Clear to Send

3 Transmit Data 6 Data Set Ready 9 Ring Indicator

The controller uses only pins 2, 3, and 5. Fastening Cycle String: S01,JB01,  4.1,A,126.2,A,A,06/09/2008 10:20:19,                                , |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    |  |  |  |                       | |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    |  |  |   |                       barcode (32 characters) |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    |  |  |  second |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    |  |  minute |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    |  hour |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    year |    |     | |     | | |  |  day |    |     | |     | | |  month |    |     | |     | | overall status (A=OK, R=NOK) |    |     | |     | angle status (A=OK, H=HIGH, L=LOW) |    |     | |     angle result (last step ran or audit step whichever is smaller, fixed decimals) |    |     | torque status (A=OK, H=HIGH, L=LOW) |    |     torque result (last step ran or audit step whichever is smaller, decimals are tool/units dependant) |    job number spindle number (1=LEADING, 2=TRAILING)

The barcode input monitors inter-character timing. When there is a 500 msec gap between characters, a complete barcode is assumed. When received, the controller logs it with all fastening cycles until another barcode is received or until the controller power is cycled. If the incoming barcode is longer than 32 characters, then the last 32 characters received are used.

All Alpha controllers have one RJ-45 Ethernet connection located on the bottom of the controller for connecting to a computer for setup, diagnostics, upgrades and configurations with Alpha Toolbox. The Alpha Toolbox Ethernet Connector is connected to internal DHCP and DNS servers. When a computer is connected via an Ethernet cable to the Alpha Toolbox connector the Alpha will give the computer an IP and other addresses to create its own network. The computer must be setup to recieve its IP Address from the Network. Once the computer has received and set the IP Address open a browser and type http://ATB.QPM into the URL line. The controller will serve the Alpha Toolbox web pages to the computer’s browser.

Expert and Specialist Alpha controllers have two RJ-45 Ethernet connections located on the bottom of the controller for connecting to a facility network or spindle network. The facility network can consist of the controller and a PC or a plant-wide fastening network. The second Ethernet connector is available to provide connections to another Alpha to create a spindle network. The single IP Address entered in the TCP/IP tab under Communications is for the facility network ETHERNET port. It is not required for users to know the static IP Address of the SPINDLE port as it is a separate network and controlled by the Expert.

Advanced and Node Alpha controllers have two RJ-45 Ethernet connections located on the bottom of the controller forconnecting to a data collection or spindle network. The data collection network can consist of the controller anda PC or a plant-wide fastening network. The second Ethernet connector is available to provide connections to another Alpha to create a spindle network. The single IP Address entered in the TCP/IP tab under Communicationsis for the network ETHERNET port and the SPINDLE port.

Standard + and Network Node Alpha controllers do not connect to a plant network, nor does it have the

industry standard Ethernet protocols or RJ-45 Ethernet connections besides the one used for Alpha Toolbox.

The following virtual ports are used for the various protocols of the controller:

Port Use Listen/Trans- mit Internet Protocol Description

80 HTTP Listen/transmit TCP/IP Browser access to the embedded web server for configura- tion and analysis; browser can use port proxy.

502 ModbusTCP Listen/transmit TCP/IP ModbusTCP I/O traffic

4545 OPEN Listen/transmit TCP/IP OPEN protocol traffic; port is assignable by end user.

4700 XML Com- mand Listen TCP/IP XML commands to controller; port is assignable by end user.

4710 XML Result Transmit TCP/IP XML response from controller; port is assignable by end user.

6575 Toolsnet Listen/Transmit TCP/IP Toolsnet protocol traffic; port is assignable by end user.

≥ 10000 PFCS Listen/Transmit TCP/IP PFCS messaging traffic in Chrysler facilities

The Alpha controller listens on the ports specified but transmits on any available port to the port specified of the target computer. The ETHERNET port uses 10/100 MBaud auto-select.

Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Ethernet/IP or Profinet Ports are present on Alpha controllers only when the option is installed. Ethernet/IP or Profinet configured Alpha controllers have two RJ-45 Ethernet connections located on the bottom of the controller for connecting to an Ethernet/IP or Profinet network when the option is ordered. The two ports are connected internally and have the same IP Address. Two ports are provided so that controllers may be daisy-chained together to create the fieldbus network rather than sending a cable from each controller back to a switch.

Ethernet/IP or Profinet Controller Network

Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha controllers can have a single Mini DeviceNet™ port, if this option is configured, for connecting the Alpha Controller to a Leading controller such as a PLC.

Pin Trailing

1 Drain

4 CAN H

Alpha Controllers Mini DeviceNet™ Connector

5 CAN L

Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha Controllers can have a single Profibus port, if this option is configured, for connecting the Alpha Controller to a Leading Profibus controller from another manufacturer.

Figure 5‑1 DB-9 Connecter Pins (Profibus Connector)

Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function

1 Empty 4 Repeater 7 Blank

2 Empty 5 Data Ref 8 Data Line Inverse

3 Data Line 6 Power Supply 9 Empty

Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha controllers can have a single Micro DeviceNet™ port , if this option is configured, for connecting peripheral devices to the Alpha Controller as a Leading controller. The assignable I/O and the embedded PLC can be programmed to run the peripheral devices.

Pin Leading

1 Drain

4 CAN H

Alpha Controllers Micro DeviceNet™ Connector

5 CAN L

Expert, Specialist, Advanced, Network Node, and Standard + Alpha controllers contain a 24V DC Input and Output Connector. All eight inputs and eight outputs are isolated 24V DC relays and contacts. The Alpha has an internal 24V DC power supply that can be used to provide the I/O signals; an external 24V DC power supply may be used instead. The following are amperage ratings: Internal 24V DC supply: Maximum = 1 ampere total External 24V DC supply: Maximum = 1 ampere per output The Alpha controller’s Input circuits conform to the IEC 61131-2 standard for PLCs.

LIMITS per IEC 61131-2

Type 2 limits

Rated Voltage

State 0 Transition State 1

Limit

V low (v) I low (ma) V trans (v) I trans (ma) V high (v) I high (ma)

24 volt Max 5 30 11 30 30 30

Min -3 ND 5 2 11 6

The Alpha controller has a MIL-C-26482 Series I plug connector with cable clamp and solder cup pins. NOTE: One I/O mating connector (P/N 21C104800) is included with each Alpha controller. Optional crimp style mating connectors, crimp tools, round connector-to-terminal strip and pig-tail I/O cables are also available.

Part No. 19-pin 24V I/O Port Included

21C104800 Mating Connector - Solder pins Standard

21C104802 Mating Connector - Crimp pins Optional

21C104804 Mating Connector - Crimp pins, crimp tool Optional

21E102202 Breakout Box for plinth mounting Optional

21C202005 I/O Cable 5M Optional

21C202010 I/O Cable 10M Optional

21C202020 I/O Cable 20M Optional

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U V

21C2020XX schematic

When the Alpha controller is used with fixtured tools, it must use a Remote Start/Stop/Reverse pendent to the

controller to provide basic switching control for the tool. Pin descriptions are shown in the following table:

Pin # Description PLC Address Pin # Description PLC Address

C Output O:0.0/0 L Input I:0.0/0

D Output O:0.0/1 M Input I:0.0/1

E Output O:0.0/2 N Input I:0.0/2

F Output O:0.0/3 P Input I:0.0/3

G Output O:0.0/4 R Input I:0.0/4

H Output O:0.0/5 S Input I:0.0/5

J Output O:0.0/6 T Input I:0.0/6

K Output O:0.0/7 U Input I:0.0/7

A 24 VDC N/A V 24 VDC Return N/A

B Output Supply N/A

(example)

Expert, Specialist, Advanced, Network Node, and Standard + Alpha controllers contain a 24V DC Input and Output Connector. The following Input/ Output (I/O) functions apply to the 24V DC I/O connector. There is a maximum of eight inputs and eight outputs for the 24V DC I/O connector. There is a maximum of 512 bytes of input and 512 bytes of output on each type of Fieldbus used with the controller (except DeviceNet with a limit of 256 bytes for both inputs and outputs). Ninety-nine is the maximum number of I/O functions that can be assigned to each Fieldbus input or output. Each I/O function can have a length of 1 to 32 bits. You must keep track of the lengths for each I/O function you assign to stay within the maximum length of the Fieldbus you are using. More than one Fieldbus connection can be used at the same time. For instance, the Alpha controller can use the 24V DC I/O connector AND ModbusTCP on Ethernet AND DeviceNet all at the same time. If more than one type of Input uses a particular function, the controller responds to an input when a function is asserted on any one of those inputs. It is important to understand how the Alpha controller, and the internal PLC, responds to the rising and falling edges of input functions as they are asserted or removed, not while the levels are high or low. The STOP bit is an exception; it is a true OR function rather than working off the transition. One type of Input does not have priority over the other. The controller responds to the first change in status of an input function, no matter which Fieldbus connection makes the change. If more than one Fieldbus shares a particular output function, that function is asserted on all shared fieldbuses. The table below lists the available input and output functions, gives a brief description and indicates the configuration options for each. The configuration options are an important aspect of the I/O functions, as they add powerful, multiple dimensions to each function in the controller. These new dimensions allow integration of the controller in unique ways, providing increased flexibility. Please see the full description of each function in the section following this table.

Inputs Description Configuration Options

DISABLE JOB Disable the job Contact Type, Job, Spindle

DISABLE TASK Disable the task Contact Type, Task, Spindle

DISABLE TOOL Disable tool (will complete running if it is in cycle) Contact Type , Spindle

IGNORED Input is not used Input is not assigned

JOB VERIFY Verify the selected job to the inputs Contact Type, Job, Spindle

JOB VERIFY (BIT) Verify the selected job to one of the input bits in a series Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

PART ID Sets the part identification Length, Trigger, Spindle

RESET JOB Reset a job Contact Type , Spindle

RESET RESULT STATUS Clear the result status Contact Type , Spindle

REVERSE Put the tool in reverse Contact Type , Spindle

SELECT JOB Select a job Contact Type, Job, Disable when open, Spindle

SELECT JOB (BIT) One bit in a series to select the job Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

SELECT TASK Select a task Contact Type, Task, Disable When Open, Spindle

SELECT TASK (BIT) One bit in a series to select the task Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

SET ZERO POSITION Used to set Zero Position for Position Control Strategy Contact Type, Spindle

START Start the tool Contact Type, Latch, Time, Spindle

Inputs Description Configuration Options

START REVERSE Put the tool in reverse and start the tool Contact Type , Spindle

STOP Stop the tool Contact Type , Spindle

TASK VERIFY Verify the selected task to the inputs Contact Type, Task, Spindle

TASK VERIFY (BIT) Verify the selected task to one of the input bits in a series Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

* Input not available on 24V

Outputs Description Configuration Options

*ANGLE Angle result value Data Type, Step, Spindle

ANGLE HIGH Fastening cycle Angle exceeded High limit Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

ANGLE LOW Fastening cycle Angle under Low limit Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

ANGLE OK Fastening cycle Angle was within limits Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

*ANGLE STATUS Angle status of last fastening cycle Data Type, Step, OK, Low, High, Spindle

*BOLT Active Accumulated Bolt Count Data Type, Spindle

*CONSTANT User defined value Data Type, Constant

CYCLE ABORTED The fastening cycle was aborted/stopped Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

CYCLE NOK Fastening cycle was NOK Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

Outputs Description Configuration Options

CYCLE OK Fastening cycle was OK Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

CYCLE STOPPED Shut off code is STOP Contact Type, Time, Spindle

DISASSEMBLY DETECTED A tightened fastener removed has been loosened Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

*FAULT CODE Fault code value Data Type, Spindle

FAULTED A fault condition is active Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

GREEN LIGHT Mimics the Green Light on the controller Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

IN CYCLE The tool is in cycle Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

IN REVERSE The tool mode is Reverse Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

JOB COMPLETE Job complete, all bolts may not be OK Contact Type, Type, Time, Job, Spindle

JOB OK (All bolts in job are OK Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

JOB SELECTED Indicates a specific job is selected Contact Type, Type, Time, Job, Spindle

JOB SELECTED (BIT) A bit to indicate the selected job in a series of bits Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

MULTI-FUNCTION BUTTON Shows the state of the multifunction button Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

NOT USED Output is not in use None

*PARAMETER Parameter number Data Type, Param, Step, Spindle

*PART ID Active PART ID Data Type, Spindle

Outputs Description Configuration Options

PM The tool requires service Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

READY The tool is ready to run Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

RED LIGHT Mimics the Red Light on the controller Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

*RUNDOWN BOLT Accumulated Bolt Count of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN DAY Day of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN HOUR Hour of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN JOB Job of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN MINUTE Minute of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN MONTH Month of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN PART ID Last fastening cycle PART ID Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN SECOND Second of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN STATUS Overall status of last fastening cycle Data Type, OK, NOK, Spindle

*RUNDOWN TASK Task of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN UNITS Torque Units of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN YEAR Year of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

SNUG ACHIEVED Is set when Snug torque exceeded Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

START TRIGGER Shows the state of the tool trigger Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

STEP BIT Indicates last step of fastening cycle in a series of bits Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

Outputs Description Configuration Options

STOPPED A STOP input is asserted Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

TASK COMPLETE Task complete (all bolts in task are OK) Contact Type, Type, Time, Task, Spindle

TASK SELECTED Indicates a specific task is selected Contact Type, Type, Time, Task, Spindle

TASK SELECTED (BIT) A bit to indicate the selected task in a series of bits Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

TOOL RUNNING The tool is running Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

*TORQUE Torque result value Data Type, Step, Spindle

TORQUE HIGH Fastening cycle Torque exceeded High limit Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

TORQUE LOW Fastening cycle Torque under Low limit Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

TORQUE OK Fastening cycle Torque was within limits Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

TORQUE STATUS Torque status of last fastening cycle Data Type, Step, OK, Low, High, Spindle

YELLOW LIGHT Mimics the Yellow Light on the controller Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

* Outputs not available on 24 VDC

Expert, Specialist, Advanced, Network Node, and Standard + Alpha controllers contain a 24V DC Input and Output Connector. Each of the single bit input functions has a Configuration setting of Contact Type. The Contact

Type can be Normally Open (N.O.) or Normally Closed (N.C.). If an input’s contact type is normally open, the input is asserted when 24V DC is applied to the 24V DC connector input pin, or when the fieldbus bit transitions from low to high. If an input’s contact type is normally closed, the input is asserted when 24V DC is removed from the 24V DC connector input pin, or when the fieldbus bit transitions from high to low. The Input functions assert on the transition only. Job or Task selection can come from multiple inputs at once, including the MFB. There is no priority, each one is equal. The Alpha controller switches its active Job or Task with each input change. The last one to change becomes the active Job or Task. Spindle – Indicates to which spindle in the multi-spindle system this function applies.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the controller disables the tool while this specific job is selected. This acts like a STOP to stop the tool during use. Use the JOB parameter under Configuration to select the job to be disabled while this input is asserted.

When removed the tool will be allowed to run while this specific job is selected.

Size: 1 bit

DISABLE JOB

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Job: Type the job number to select when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the Job is to be disabled.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the tool is disabled while this specific task is selected. This acts like a STOP to stop the tool during use. Use the Task parameter under Configuration to select the disabled task.

When removed, the tool will be allowed to run while this specific task is selected.

Size: 1 bit

DISABLE TASK

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Task: Type the task number to disable when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the Task is to be disabled.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller prevents the tool from running. It does NOT stop the tool if the tool is running, but prevents it from running when the next START signal is applied. The START input can come from any bus or the tool trigger.

When removed the tool is allowed to run after the next START input.

DISABLE TOOL

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the tool is to be disabled.

IGNORE The input is not used. This is a placeholder. For fieldbus, the length of this input function may be set to any size that meets the need.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected job number is equal to this input’s job number. Use the JOB parameter under Configuration to select the job number to verify. If the wrong job is selected the tool is disabled.

When removed, verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit

JOB VERIFY

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Job: Type the job number to verify when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the job is to be verified.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected and active job is equal to this input’s job. Use the BIT parameter under Configuration to select the job number to verify. If there is a mismatch between the active job number and this input’s job number the tool is disabled. This is one bit of a binary number created by many of these bits. See SELECT TASK BIT to understand how to use bits to create binary numbers.

When removed verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

JOB VERIFY BIT

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit to be in the binary number scheme to verify a job.

Mode: All JOB VERIFY BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) plus 1.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the job is to be verified.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any fieldbus input, the controller reads the new PART ID input and places the data into the Part ID buffer. This is added to the fastening cycle data and stored in the controller. This input function is NOT available on the 24V DC input bus.

Size: Can be any size from 1 to 32 bytes.

*PART ID

When removed nothing happens.

Configuration:

Length: Type the length of the expected data string in bits.

Spindle: Type the spindle number to receive the PART ID data.

When asserted, on any input, the controller resets the accumulated bolt count to zero for the active job and acts as a part entry to re-enable the tool if disabled. The tool could be disabled due to “Error Proofing” and the accumulat- ed bolt count equal to target bolt count.

When removed nothing happens.

RESET JOB

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the job is to be reset.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller resets to 0 (zero) any fastening cycle results status output bit on the same bus. Meaning, if asserted on DeviceNet, only the DeviceNet output status bits are reset. Output status bits on other buses will remain in their original state.

The list of status bits that will reset are:

CYCLE OK CYCLE NOK

TORQUE OK TORQUE HIGH

TORQUE LOW ANGLE OK

ANGLE HIGH ANGLE LOW

RESET RESULT STATUS

CYCLE ABORTED CYCLE STOP

CURRENT OK CURRENT HIGH

CURRENT LOW

When removed nothing happens.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the result status is to be reset.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the tool is placed in Reverse (disassembly) mode. This does NOT run the tool in Reverse mode, it changes the tool mode from Forward to Reverse. If one input is required to do both functions, see REVERSE START.

When removed, from any input type, the controller places the tool into Forward (assembly) mode.

REVERSE

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for the tool to be put into reverse.

Inputs Description

When asserted, on any input type, the controller makes this input’s Job the active Job.

When removed either nothing happens or if “Disable when open” is set to yes, then the tool becomes disabled.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SELECT JOB

Job: Type the job number to select when this input is asserted.

Disable when open:

Yes – Disables the tool when this input is removed.

No – Does not disable the tool upon input removal.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the job is to be selected.

When asserted or removed on any input type, the controller selects a job. This is one bit, in a series of bits, to create a binary number.

See SELECT TASK (BIT) function description for explanation of this bit (note that this references Jobs not Tasks).

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SELECT JOB (BIT)

Bit: Type the number of this bit, in the binary number scheme, to select jobs.

Mode: All JOB SELECT BITs must be the same mode, modes cannot be mixed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and adds the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the job is to be selected.

When asserted, on any input type, the controller makes this input’s Task the active Task.

When removed either nothing happens or if “Disable when open” is selected as yes, then the tool becomes dis- abled.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SELECT TASK

Task: Type the Task number to select when this input is asserted.

Disable when open:

Yes – Disables the tool when this input is removed.

No – Does not disable the tool upon input removal.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the task is to be selected.

Inputs Description

When asserted or removed, on any input bus, the controller selects a Task. This is one bit, in a series of bits, to create a binary number.

The number created by this and other SELECT TASK BITs determines the active task for the tool. More than one input assigned as a TASK SELECT BIT creates a number greater than one. The maximum number of tasks required determines the maximum number of these inputs.

In binary numbers, the digit furthest to the right is the ones digit. The next digit to the left is the twos digit, next is the fours digit, then the eights digit, and so on. The integer equivalent to a binary number can be found by summing all the weighted values of the selected digits. For example, the binary number 10101 is equivalent to the integer 21. The math is 1 + 4 + 16 = 21: the high digits (one) are added together and the low digits (zero) are ignored.

Bit Number 4 3 2 1 0

Weighted Value 16 8 4 2 1

Binary Number 1 0 1 0 1

SELECT TASK (BIT)

24V DC Pins (example) R P N M L

To select task #21 on the controller at least five inputs are assigned as TASK SELECT (BIT). Each would then be given a bit number to have a series of bits with different weighted values. For example, on the 24 VDC input pin L is bit 0, pin M is bit 1, pin N is bit 2, pin P is bit 3, and pin R is bit 4. Therefore, to select task #21, assert pins L, N and R.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number of this bit, in the binary number scheme, to select tasks.

Mode: All TASK SELECT BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and adds the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the task is to be selected.

When asserted, on any Input type, the Zero Position for the tool is set. This Zero Position is used in the Position Control strategy to stop the tool at the Zero Position after meeting the Snug Torque value.

Size: 1 bit

SET ZERO POSITION

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the Zero Positions is to be set.

Inputs Description

When asserted, on any input type, the tool starts and runs the currently selected job/task. This input is overridden by the STOP input. If STOP is used and a tool restart is required, remove the STOP, remove the START, then re-assert the START. If the tool is required to operate in Disassembly mode, remove the START, assert the REVERSE input, and then re-assert the START.

When removed, from any bus of Input, the tool stops. Even if a second START input is active, the tool stops when any START is removed.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

START

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Latch: This is applicable to external inputs only. This is not applicable to the trigger on the tool handle.

Yes – Causes the START input to latch internally after a time period has elapsed. The physical START input can be removed without stopping the tool. The tool runs until all steps in the active task are complete or time out. A TIME parameter is available to set how long the START input must be applied, in seconds, before the Latch becomes active.

No – The Latch function is off.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for tool to be started.

When asserted on any input bus, the tool mode is switched to Reverse (Disassembly) AND the tool is started. This is different from the REVERSE input function in that REVERSE puts the tool into Reverse mode only.

When removed the tool stops and switches back to Forward mode.

START RE- VERSE

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for tool to be reversed.

When asserted, on any input type, the controller stops the tool. It also prevents the tool from running while it is applied.

When removed nothing happens other than the tool runs.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for tool to be stopped.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected and active task is equal to this input’s task. Use the TASK parameter under Configuration to select the task number to verify. If the wrong task is selected the tool is disabled.

When removed, verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit

TASK VERIFY

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Task: Type the task number to verify when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the task is to be verified.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected task number is equal to this input’s task num- ber. Use the BIT parameter under Configuration to select the task number to verify. If there is a mismatch between the active task and the selected task the tool is disabled. This is one bit of a binary number created by many of these bits. See SELECT TASK BIT to understand how to use bits to create binary numbers.

When removed verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be size any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

TASK VERIFY BIT

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit will be in the binary number scheme to verify a task.

Mode: All TASK VERIFY BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and add the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the task is to be verified.

* Outputs not available on 24 VDC

Expert, Specialist, Advanced, Network Node, and Standard + Alpha controllers contain a 24V DC Input and Output Connector. Each of the output functions has Configuration settings: Contact types, Output types and others. It is recommended to configure them immediately once the output functions are assigned to a pin. Contact Type The Contact Type can be Normally Open (N.O.) or Normally Closed (N.C.). Sourcing Outputs (PNP type) If an output’s contact type is normally open and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 0V DC to 24V DC. If an output’s contact type is normally closed and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 24V DC to 0V DC. Sinking Outputs (NPN type) If an output’s contact type is normally open and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 24V DC to 0V DC. If an output’s contact type is normally closed and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 0V DC to 24V DC. Output Type The Output Type defines the behavior of the output signal. Normal – The output asserts and stays asserted until a reset condition occurs. Minimum On Time – Keeps the output asserted for this minimum time in seconds, even though a reset condition occurs. After the timer is finished, the output resets if a reset condition has occurred, otherwise it remains asserted until a reset condition occurs. Timed – The output asserts for this period of time, then resets on its own without waiting for the reset condition to occur. Time – Units are in seconds. Flash – The output flashes for as long as it is asserted. Period – Sets the flashing on and off times, which are equal. Units are in seconds Spindle – Indicates from which spindle in the multi-spindle system this function comes.

Outputs Description

This output is the peak achieved angle value during the fastening cycle from the Audit step. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*ANGLE

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle value comes.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved angle value is above the High Angle limit for the Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

ANGLE HIGH

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved angle value is below the Low Angle limits for the Au- dit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

ANGLE LOW

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved angle value is within limits for the Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

ANGLE OK

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

Outputs Description

This output will be one of three selections. The selections are the User Defined Value for the associated angle status of the last fastening cycle. For example: if the last fastening cycle’s angle status was Low, and the User Defined Value for Low is -, then this output value is-.

The OK User Defined Value is selected when the achieved angle for the defined Step are within specified limits.

The Low User Defined Value is selected when the achieved angle for the defined Step is below the Low Angle limit.

The High User Defined Value is selected when the achieved angle, for the defined Step, is above the High Angle limit.

It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

*ANGLE STATUS

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

OK: User Defined Value

Low: User Defined Value

High: User Defined Value

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

This output is the value of the active accumulated bolt count. As the bolt count changes so does this output.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

*BOLT

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the bolt status comes.

Outputs Description

This value is defined by the end user in the Constant parameter. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*CONSTANT

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Constant: Type the value of the constant required

Asserts when the controller shuts the tool off due to a fault or if the Stop/Abort within Limits parameter is used and the fastening cycle has a shutoff code of ABORT. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE ABORTED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the abort status comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and/or angle for the Audit step are NOT within specified limits. Also asserts when the Stop/Abort within Limits parameter is set to Yes and the tool is stopped or aborted within limits. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE NOK

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and angle for the Audit step are within specified limits. Will not assert if the Stop/Abort within Limits parameter is set to Yes and the tool is stopped or aborted within limits. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE OK

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the tool shuts off due to a loss of Start signal or the operator released the trigger before the target was achieved. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE STOPPED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Asserts when the tool is running in Reverse and the achieved torque value exceeds the Threshold Torque value through some rotation. Resets when the tool is stopped.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

DISASSEMBLY DETECTED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the disassembly status comes.

Outputs Description

This output is the number value of the fault code present in the controller. It asserts when a fault is active and resets when the fault clears. The values are as follows:

1 – Overcurrent Fault! 2 – Logic Voltage Fault!

3 – Position Feedback Fault! 4 – Transducer Span Fault!

5 – Temperature Fault! 6 – Unrecognized Tool!

7 – Tool Communications! 8 – Transducer Current Fault!

9 – Transducer Zero Fault! 10 – Unused

11 – Unused 12 – Unused

*FAULT CODE

13 – Unsupported Tool! 14 – GFI Fault!

15 – Servo Connection Fault!

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the fault code comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when there is a fault on the controller. Resets when the fault clears.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

FAULTED

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the fault comes.

Mimics the Green status lights on the tool.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

GREEN LIGHT

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Asserts during the fastening cycle when the achieved torque value exceeds the Threshold Torque value. Resets when the fastening cycle has ended.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

IN CYCLE

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the tool’s operation is set to Reverse. Resets when the tool’s operation is set to Forward.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

IN REVERSE

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when a job is completed (accumulated bolt count equals target bolt count). NOTE: not all bolts may be OK. Resets when a different job is selected or when the input RESET JOB is asserted.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

JOB COMPLETE

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a job is completed (accumulated bolt count equals target bolt count) and all bolts are OK. Resets when a different job is selected or when the input RESET JOB is asserted.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

JOB OK

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a job is selected by any means. Resets when the active job is complete.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

JOB SELECTED

Job: Type the job number that, when selected, asserts this output.

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when required to indicate the active job. This is one bit in a series of bits to create a binary number. As jobs change so will the binary number created from these bits.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit to be in the binary number scheme for selected jobs.

JOB SELECTED BIT

Mode: All JOB SELECTED BITs must be the same mode, modes cannot be mixed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and adda the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the tool’s Multi-function Button is pressed. Resets when the Multi-function Button is released.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

MULTI-FUNCTION BUTTON

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

NOT USED The output is not used. This is essentially a placeholder.

For fieldbus, the length of this input function may be set to any size that meets the need.

This output is the value of the selected Parameter. It changes when the parameter changes.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

*PARAMETER

Parameter: Strategy, Torque Target, High Torque, Low Torque, Angle Target, High Angle, Low Angle, Snug Torque, Speed, Step Name, Torque Cal, Tool Serial Number, Torque Bailout, Angle Bailout, Downshift Torque, Downshift Speed, Tool Model Number, Task Name, Job Name, Task Bolt Count.

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This value is equal to and changes as the PART ID input changes.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

*PART ID

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when the Preventive Maintenance Count in the tool’s memory has exceeded the Preventive Mainte- nance Threshold. Resets when the Preventive Maintenance Count is reset to zero.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when there is no fault on the controller and the tool is ready to run. This output resets when the tool is disabled. The blue light on the controller and tool will illuminate when this output is on.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

READY

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Mimics the Red status lights on the tool.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

RED LIGHT

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Outputs Description

This is the accumulated bolt count value of the last fastening cycle. It asserts when the fastening cycle is com- plete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN BOLT

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the day value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN DAY

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the hour value of the last fastening cycle time. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN HOUR

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This value indicates the job in which the last fastening cycle was performed. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN JOB

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the minute value of the last fastening cycle time. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN MINUTE

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This is the month value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN MONTH

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This is the PART ID value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN PART ID

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the second value of the last fastening cycle time. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN SECOND

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This output will be one of two selections. The selections are the User Defined Value for the associated status of the last fastening cycle. For example: if the last fastening cycle status was OK, and the User Defined Value for OK is Good, then this output value is Good.

The OK User Defined Value asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and angle for the Audit step are within specified limits.

The NOK User Defined Value asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and angle for the Audit step are NOT within specified limits.

The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

*RUNDOWN STATUS

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

OK: User Defined Value

NOK: User Define Value

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This value indicates the task in which the last fastening cycle was performed. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN TASK

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This is the numeric equivalent value of the torque units of the last fastening cycle. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

The numeric equivalent values are:

0 – NM

1 – FTLB

2 – INLB

3 – INOZ

*RUNDOWN UNITS

4 – KGM

5 - KGCM

6 – NCM

7 – NDM

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the year value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN YEAR

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle if the achieved torque value exceeds the Snug Torque value during the fastening cycle. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SNUG ACHIEVED

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when the tool’s trigger is pressed. Resets when the tool trigger is released.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

START TRIGGER

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of the fastening cycle to indicate the last step ran. This is one bit, in a series of bits, to create a binary number.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit will be in the binary number scheme for steps.

STEP (BIT)

Mode: All STEP BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and add the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the STOP input is received, or anytime the tool is stopped. Resets when the STOP input or the Stop Tool Operation is reset. The

icon is on when this output is on.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

STOPPED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a task is complete (all bolts assigned to task are OK). Resets when a task is selected.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TASK COMPLETE

Task: Type the task number that, when completed, asserts this output.

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a task is selected by any means. Resets when the active task is complete.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TASK SELECTED

Task: Type the task number that, when selected, asserts this output.

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when required to indicate the active task. This is one bit in a series of bits to create a binary number. As tasks change so will the binary number created from these bits.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TASK SELECTED BIT

Bit: Type the number this bit will be in the binary number scheme for selected tasks.

Mode: All TASK SELECTED BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and add the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal come s.

Asserts anytime the tool is energized. Resets when the tool is commanded to stop.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

TOOL RUNNING

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This output is the peak achieved torque value during the fastening cycle from the Audit step. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

*TORQUE

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal come s.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque value is above the High Torque limit for the Au- dit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TORQUE HIGH

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque value is below the Low Torque limits Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TORQUE LOW

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal come s.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque value is within limits for the Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TORQUE OK

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This output will be one of three selections. The selections are the User Defined Value for the associated torque status of the last fastening cycle. For example: if the last fastening cycle’s torque status was High, and the User Defined Value for High is +, then this output value is +.

The OK User Defined Value is selected when the achieved torque for the defined step are within specified limits.

The Low User Defined Value is selected cycle when the achieved torque for the defined Step is below the Low Torque limit.

The High User Defined Value is selected when the achieved torque for the defined step is above the High Torque limit.

It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

* TORQUE STATUS

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

OK: User Defined Value

Low: User Defined Value

High: User Defined Value

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Mimics the Yellow status lights on the tool.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

YELLOW LIGHT

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Outputs Description

* Outputs not available on 24 VDC

The fieldbus Modbus TCP comes as a standard feature on the Ethernet port in Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha controllers. This is a Modbus variant used for communications over TCP/IP networks, connecting over virtual port 502. By default the Modbus TCP fieldbus does not have any I/O assigned. See section “3.3.7 I/O Tab” on page 96 to learn how to edit the I/O. See section “6.12 Assignable Input and Output Functions” on page 130 to learn about the values to edit. There is no configuration or programming specifically for the Modbus protocol itself. The Alpha’s CPU takes care of all the protocol’s overhead and handshaking requirements. The QB Alpha controllers supports the following public Modbus function codes: 01 (0x01) Read Coils 02 (0x02) Read Discsreet Inputs 03 (0x03) Read Holding Registers 04 (0x04) Read Input Registers 05 (0x05) Write Single Coil 06 (0x06) Write Single Register 15 (0x0F) Write Multiple Coils 16 (0x10) Write Multiple Registers Please visit http://Modbus.org for more information about the Modbus fieldbus. Use the following table to correlate the external PLC addressing to the controller’s inputs and outputs.

Memory Type Controller I/O Type External PLC Ad- dress Data Type External PLC

Read/ Write

“1” Coil Input 10001 - 20256 Bit Read/ Write

“2” Input Output 20001 - 20256 Bit(s) Read

"3" Holding Register Input 30001 - 30256 Mixed Read/ Write

"4" Input Register Output 40001 - 40256 Mixed Read

“5” Force Single Coil Input 50001 - 50256 Bit Read/ Write

"6" Single Register Input 60001 - 60256 Mixed Read/ Write

“15” Force Multiple Coils Input 0F0001 - 0F0256 Bit(s) Read/ Write

"16" Multiple Register Input 100001 - 100256 Mixed Read/ Write

For Mixed Data Type the type of data depends on the user assigned input and output functions. It is important to understand that the coils and registers use the same memory.

External PLC Alpha Controller

Address # Modbus Input* Assigned Function Length (Bits)

30001:0 0/0 Start 1

30001:1 0/1 Stop 1

30001:2 0/2 Reverse 1

30001:3 0/3 Job Select (Bit) 0 1

30001:4 0/4 Job Select (Bit) 1 1

30001:5 0/5 Job Select (Bit) 2 1

30001:6, 7 0/6 Ignored 2

30001:8 - 15 1/0 Ignored 8

30002 2/0 Part ID (ASCII) 80

# Register:Bit *Byte/Bit

External PLC Alpha Controller

Address # Modbus Output* Assigned Function Length (Bits)

40001:0 0/0 Fault 1

40001:1 0/1 Ready 1

40001:2 0/2 Tool Running 1

40001:3 0/3 In Cycle 1

40001:4 0/4 Cycle OK 1

40001:5 0/5 Cycle NOK 1

40001:6, 7 0/6 Not Used 2

40001:8 -15 1/0 Not Used 8

40002 2/0 Torque (Float) 32

40004 6/0 Angle (Float) 32

# Register:Bit *Byte/Bit

Integer, Float and ASCII data must start on a zero (first) bit of a byte and not in the middle of a byte. Function code 04 (0x04) can only transmit a 16-bit register, not the individual bits within a register. The PLC will need to capture the 16-bit register and then parse the individual bits after receipt.

Each Alpha Controller has an internal software PLC. This PLC serves to enhance the integration of the Alpha controller into an end user’s plant. The PLC emulates the Allen Bradley SLC-504 controller and uses many of the same layouts, addressing structures and commands. Alpha Toolbox has a PLC editor but RSLogix500 can also be used to program ladder logic for the embedded PLC.

The Alpha controller’s PLC has a 4-slot virtual rack layout. There are some differences between a SLC-504 rack and the Alpha rack. The CPU card does not have its own slot, rather it is taken into account since it is embedded and cannot be changed. The discreet 24 VDC I/O uses the same slot rather than separate input or output “cards”. The virtual rack is filled as follows:

The 24V DC I/O Module in slot 0 reflects the physical I/O on the Alpha. The Trailing Fieldbus card in slot #2 uses the M-12 DeviceNet connector on the bottom of the Alpha when the DeviceNet option is ordered. The DB-9 connector is used when Profibus is ordered. The RJ-45 jacks are used when Ethernet/IP or Profinet are ordered.

The ModbusTCP card in slot #1 comes installed as standard equipment on Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha controllers. Each uses the RJ-45 ETHERNET jack on the bottom of the Alpha. The optional DeviceNet Scanner card in slot #3 can be configured to auto-map the devices connected to it. This card uses the M-5

DeviceNet connector on the bottom of the Alpha if this option is ordered.

As ASCII it would be: SOR XIC I:0.0/0 OTE 0.0/0 EOR See section “6.11 Input and Output Connector” on page 126 for PLC addressing of the 24V DC connector.

See Tabel 1 and Table 2 for a listing of supported instructions and file types. NOTE: The Alpha controller supports only one ladder in the program file. Jump commands are not supported so all logic must be performed in one ladder. Table 1: Supported Instructions

Instruction Descriptions Instruction Descriptions Instruction Descriptions

ABS Absolute CTU Count Up NOT Not

ACI String to Integer DIV Divide NXB Next Branch

ACL ASCII Clear Buffer END Program End OR OR

ACN String Concatenate EOR End of Rung OSR One-Shot Rising

ADD Add EQU Equal OTE Output Energize

AEX String Extract GEQ Greater Than or Equal OTL Output Latch

AIC Integer to String GRT Greater Than OUT Output Unlatch

AND And LEQ Less Than or Equal RES Reset

ARD ASCII Read Characters LES Less Than RTO Retentive Timer

ASC String search LIM Limit Test SOR Start of Rung

ASR ASCII String Compare MEQ Masked Comparison for Equal SUB Subtract

AWT ASCII Write MOV Move TOF Timer Off-Delay

BND Branch End MUL Multiply TON Timer On-Delay

BST Branch Start MVM Masked Move XIC Examine if Closed

CLR Clear NEG Negate XIO Examine if Open

CTD Count Down NEQ Not Equal XOR Exclusive OR

Table 2 Supported Files

O0 OUTPUT

I1 INPUT

B3 BINARY

T4 TIMER

C5 COUNTER

R6 CONTROL

N7 INTEGER

ST14 STRING

Instructions Description

ABS Absolute Calculates the absolute value of the source and places the result in the destination.

Instructions Description

ACI String to Integer Use the ACI instruction to convert a numeric ASCII string to an integer value between -32,768 and 32,767.

ACL ASCII Clear Buffer Clears the send and/or the receive buffers.

ACN String Concatenate Combines two strings using ASCII strings as operands. The second string is appended to the first and the result stored in the destination.

ADD Use the ADD instruction to add one value (source A) to another value (source B) and place the result in the destination.

String Extract Use the AEX instruction to create a new string by taking a portion of an existing string and moving it to the new string. Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction. • Source is the existing string. The source value is not affected by this instruction. • Index is the starting position (from 1 to 82) of the string to extract (an index of 1 indi- cates the left-most character of the string). • Number is the number of characters (from 1 to 82) to extract (startis at the indexed position). If the index plus the number is greater than the total characters in the source string, the destination string will be the characters from the index to the end of the source string. • Destination is the string function (ST14:X) where the extracted string is stored.

AIC Integer to String Converts an integer value, between -32,768 and 32,767, to an ASCII string.

AND Performs a bit-by-bit logical AND. The operation is performed using the value at source A and the value at source B. The result is stored in the destination.

ASCII read characters Performs a read from a source channel and moves the value into a destination string. Provides a Result integer for the status of the read. Channel 0 = Serial port Channel 2 = Ethernet port The internal PLC supports reading from and writing to the Network Ethernet port on the con- trollers. Here are the rules: If Channel ID is set to 2 then the virtual port 8786 will be used. If a Channel ID >1024 is used then that number is the virtual port used. Only one virtual port can be used and the first rung in the logic with an ARD or ARW command with a Channel ID >1024 determines which virtual port will be used. The Channel ID cannot be set to an address, it must be an integer.

Instructions Description

String Search Use the ASC instruction to search an existing string for an occurrence of the source string. Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction: • Source is the string you want to find when examining the search string. • Index is the starting position (from 1 to 82) of the source string. (An index of 1 indi- cates the left-most character of the string.) • Search is the string you want to examine. • Result is an integer where the processor stores the position of the search string where the source string begins. If no match is found, result is set equal to zero.

ASCII String Compare Use the ASR instruction to compare two ASCII strings. The system looks for a match in length and upper/lower case characters. If two strings are identical, the rung is true; if there are any differences, the rung is false.

ASCII Write Writes a source string to the designated channel. Provides a Result integer for the status of the write. Channel 0 = Serial port Channel 1 = Display Channel 2 = Ethernet The internal PLC supports reading from and writing to the Network Ethernet port on the con- trollers. Here are the rules: If Channel ID is set to 2 then the virtual port 8786 will be used. If a Channel ID >1024 is used then that number is the virtual port used. Only one virtual port can be used and the first rung in the logic with an ARD or ARW command with a Channel ID >1024 determines which virtual port will be used. The Channel ID cannot be set to an address, it must be an integer.

BND Branch End Marks the end of a branch.

BST Branch Start Marks the beginning of a new branch on a rung.

CLR Clear Sets the value of a destination word to zero.

Instructions Description

Count Down Counts false-to-true transitions. When rung conditions for a CTD instruction have made a false-to-true transition, the accumu- lated value is decremented by one count, provided that the rung containing the CTD instruction is evaluated between these transitions. The accumulated counts are retained when the rung conditions again becomes false. The accu- mulated count is retained until cleared by a reset (RES) instruction that has the same address as the counter reset.

A RES instruction having the same address as the CTD instruction is executed OR the count is increment- ed greater than or equal to +32,767 with a CTU instruction Done Bit DN (Bit 13) Accumulated value is equal to or greater than the preset value The accumulated value becomes less than the preset value Count Down Enable Bit CU (Bit 14) rung conditions are true Rung conditions go false or a RES instruction having the same address as the CTD instruction is enabled

Count Down Underflow Bit OV (Bit 11)

Accumulated value wraps around to +32,768 from -32,767

Count Up Counts false-to-true rung transitions. When rung conditions for a CTU instruction have made a false-to-true transition, the accumu- lated value is incremented by one count, provided that the rung containing the CTU instruction is evaluated between these transitions. The accumulated value is retained when the rung conditions again become false. The accumu- lated count is retained until cleared by a reset (RES) instruction that has the same address as the counter reset. The count value must remain in the range of -32768 to 32767. If the count value goes above 32767 the overflow (OV) bit is set. If the count value goes below -32768, the counter status underflow (UN) bit is set. A counter can be reset to zero using the reset (RES) instruction.

A RES instruction having the same address as the CTU instruction is executed OR the count is dec- remented less than or equal to +32,767 with a CTD instruction Done Bit DN (Bit 13) Accumulated value is equal to or greater than the preset value The accumulated value becomes less than the preset value

Count Up Over- flow Bit OV (Bit 12)

Accumulated value wraps around to -32,768 from +32,767

Count Up Enable Bit CU (Bit 15) Rung conditions are true Rung conditions go false or a RES instruction having the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled

Instructions Description

Divide Use the DIV instruction to divide one value (source A) by another (source B). The rounded quo- tient is then placed in the destination. If the remainder is 0.5 or greater, round up occurs in the destination. The unrounded quotient is stored in the most significant word of the math register. The remainder is placed in the least significant word of the math register.

END Program End Marks the end of the program.

EOR End of Rung Marks the end of a rung.

Equal Use the EQU instruction to test whether two values are equal. If source A and source B are equal, the instruction is logically true. If these values are not equal, the instruction is logically false.

Greater than or Equal Use the GEQ instruction to test whether one value (source A) is greater than or equal to another (source B). If the value at source A is greater than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is less than the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Greater Than Use the GRT instruction to test whether one value (source A) is greater than another (source B). If the value at source A is greater than the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is less than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Less Than or Equal Use the LEQ instruction to test whether one value (source A) is less than or equal to another (source B). If the value at source A is less than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is greater than the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Less Than Use the LES instruction to test whether one value (source A) is less than another (source B). If source A is less than the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is greater than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Limit Test Use the LIM instruction to test for values within or outside a specified range, depending on how limits are set. If the Low Limit has a value equal to or less than the High Limit, the instruction is true when the Test value is between the limits or is equal to either limit. If the Test value is outside the limits, the instruction is false.

Instructions Description

Masked Comparison for Equal Use the MEQ instruction to compare data at a source address with data at a compare address. Use of this instruction allows portions of the data to be masked by a separate word. The source is the address of the value to compare. The mask is the address of the mask through which the instruction moves data. The mask can also be a hexadecimal value (constant). The compare is an integer value or the address of the reference. If the 16 bits of data at the source address are equal to the 16 bits of data at the compare address (less masked bits), the instruction is true.

Message Use MSG to send an instruction directly to the CPU. Can be used to send messages to trailing Alpha controllers. Proper syntax is required. Text editor syntax: MSG # XXXXH HW LW: where # is spindle number, XXXXH is the command, HW is High Word and LW is Low Word. High Words and Low Words contain information provid- ed by the instruction. The user must be trained by a STANLEY trainer to use this instruction.

Monitor Use MON to monitor for a CPU event and use as a trigger. Can be used to send messages to trailing Alpha controllers. Proper syntax is required. Text editor syntax: MSG # XXXXH HW LW: where # is spindle number, XXXXH is the command, HW is High Word and LW is Low Word. High Words and Low Words contain information provid- ed by the instruction. The user must be trained by a STANLEY trainer to use this instruction.

MOV Move This output instruction moves the source value to the destination location. As long as the rung remains true, the instruction moves the data each scan.

MUL Multiply Use the MUL instruction to multiply one value (source A) by another (source B) and place the result in the destination.

Masked Move The MVM instruction is a word instruction that moves data from a source location to a destina- tion, and allows portions of the destination data to be masked by a separate word. As long as the rung remains true, the instruction moves the data each scan.

NEG Negate Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of the source and then place it in the destination. The destination contains the two’s complement of the source.

Not Equal Use the NEQ instruction to test whether two values are not equal. If source A and source B are not equal, the instruction is logically true. If the two values are equal, the instruction is logically false.

NOT This instruction performs a bit-by-bit logical NOT. The operation is performed using the value at source A. The result (one’s complement of A) is stored in the destination.

Instructions Description

NXB Next Branch Marks the beginning of another branch.

Instructions Description

OR This instruction performs a bit-by-bit logical OR. The operation is performed using the value at source A and the value at source B. The result is stored in the destination.

One Shot Rising The OSR instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time. Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on the change of state of the rung from false-to-true. When the rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction go from false-to-true, the OSR instruc- tion will be true for one scan. After one scan is complete, the OSR instruction becomes false, even if the rung conditions preceding it remain true. The OSR instruction will only become true again if the rung conditions preceding it transition from false-to-true. The address assigned to the OSR instruction is not the one-shot address referenced by the program, nor does it indicate the state of the OSR instruction. This address allows the OSR instruction to remember its previous rung state.

OTE Output Energize Use the OTE instruction in the ladder program to turn on a bit when rung conditions are evalu- ated as true.

Output Latch OTL is a retentive output instruction. OTL can only turn on a bit (while OTU can only turn off a bit). This instruction is usually used in pair with the OTU instruction. The program can examine a bit controlled by OTL instructions as often as necessary. When rung conditions become false (after being true), the bit remains set and the correspond- ing output remains energized. When enabled, the latch instruction tells the controller to turn on the addressed bit. Thereafter, the bit remains on, regardless of the rung condition, until the bit is turned off (typically by an OTU instruction in another rung).

Output Unlatch OTU is a retentive output instruction. OTU can only turn off a bit (while OTL can only turn on a bit). This instruction is usually used in pairs with the OTL instruction. The program can examine a bit controlled by the OTU instruction as often as necessary. The unlatch instruction tells the controller to turn off the addressed bit. Thereafter, the bit re- mains off, regardless of the rung condition, until it is turned on (typically by an OTL instruction in another rung).

Reset Use a RES instruction to reset a timer or counter. When the RES instruction is enabled, it resets the Timer On Delay (TON), Retentive Timer (RTO), Count Up (CTU) or Count Down (CTD) instruc- tion having the same address as the RES instruction.

Instructions Description

Retentive Timer Use the RTO instruction to turn an output on or off after its timer has been on for a preset time interval. The RTO instruction is a retentive instruction that begins to count millisecond intervals when rung conditions become true. The RTO instruction retains its accumulated value when the rung conditions become false. The Time Base must be 10 msec. The timer will not work in any other Time Base.

rung conditions are true and the accumulated value is less than the preset value

Rung conditions go false or when the done bit is set

Timer Timing Bit TT (Bit 14)

Timer Enable Bit EN (Bit 15) rung conditions are true rung conditions go false or if the timer is reset with the RES instruction

SOR Start of Rung Marks the beginning of a new rung.

SUB Subtract Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value (source B) from another (source A) and place the result in the destination.

Timer Off Delay Use the TOF instruction to turn an output on or off after its rung has been off for a preset time interval. The TOF instruction begins to count millisecond intervals when the rung makes a true- to-false transition. As long as rung conditions remain false, the timer increments its accumulat- ed value (ACC) each millisecond until it reaches the preset value (PRE). The accumulated value is reset when rung conditions go true regardless of whether the timer has timed out. The Time Base must be 10 msec. The timer will not work in any other Time Base.

rung conditions go false and the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value rung conditions are true

Timer Done Bit DN (Bit 13)

rung conditions are false and the accumulated value is less than the preset value

rung conditions go true or when the done bit is set

Timer Timing Bit TT (Bit 14)

Timer Enable Bit EN (Bit 15) rung conditions are false rung conditions go true

Instructions Description

Timer On Delay Use the TON instruction to turn an output on or off after the timer has been on for a preset time interval. The TON instruction begins to count millisecond intervals when rung conditions become true. As long as rung conditions remain true, the timer adjusts its accumulated value (ACC) each evaluation until it reaches the preset value (PRE). The accumulated value is reset when rung conditions go false, regardless of whether the timer has timed out. The Time Base must be 10 msec. The timer will not work in any other Time Base.

rung conditions are true and the accumulated value is less than the preset value

rung conditions go false or when the done bit is set

Timer Timing Bit TT (bit 14)

Timer Enable Bit EN (bit 15) rung conditions are true rung conditions go false

Examine If Closed Use the XIC instruction in the ladder program to determine if a bit is on. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is on (1), then the instruction is evaluated as true. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is off (0), then the instruction is evaluated as false.

Examine If Open Use the XIO instruction in the ladder program to determine if a bit is off. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is off (0), then the instruction is evaluated as true. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is on (1), then the instruction is evaluated as false.

XOR Exclusive Or Performs a bit-by-bit logical Exclusive Or. The operation is performed using the value at source A and the value at source B. The result is stored in the destination.

Use the PLC editor provided in Alpha Toolbox to create and edit ladder logic files. See section “4.1 Connection” on page 98 on how to connect to Alpha Toolbox with a computer. To get to the PLC Editor in Alpha Toolbox navigate to the Setup/Other/PLC page and click on the Edit button.

The Add Branch button adds a branch to the rung or around an instruction. The List of Instruction buttons add the instruction to the ladder logic. Use the mouse to click, hold and drag the instruction to the desired spot on the ladder. When an instruction starts moving Add Points appear to show all the available places to add the instruction on the ladder. Or click on a branch or other instruction in the ladder and then click an instruction button in the list of instructions to add to the ladder. Undo removes the last item or action and reverting to a previous state. Revert back to any previous state since the last save by clicking Undo multiple times.

Redo revert the effects of the undo action. Multiple Redo’s are allowed through all stored Undo states. Add Initialization Files button will insert predefined strings and integers that are initialized when the PLC starts.

Integers are stored in N7:X files and must be a Decimal number in the range from 32767 to -32768. Strings are stored in ST14:X files and their values must be ASCII characters. Maximum string length is 80 characters plus a carriage return and line feed (CRLF). When string files are written they are displayed in capital letters, but if they were writen in lower case they will be stored in lower case. The Add Rung button adds another rung to the bottom of the ladder. Zoom In and Out allows the user to adjust the size of the view. To move a rung, select the rung by clicking it with the mouse and clicking on one of the green move icons. The rungs may be moved up or down in single steps using the single arrow icons or to the top or bottom using the multiple arrow icons. The red circle with the X delete icon is available for all items on the rung. Select the item to be deleted by clicking it with the mouse and then click the delete icon. The Add Description icon is available for all items on the ladder. Select the item by clicking it with the mouse and then click the Add Description icon. Type in a description and click the green check icon to save it or the red X icon to discard it.

While editing the ladder the Save or Cancel dialog box appears. Press the Apply button to save the changes. Press the Cancel button to discard the changes. When adding Initialization Files the window must first be saved by clicking Apply and then the ladder logic must be saved by clicking Apply again.

Clicking a field will select the box and open its value edit window along with showing the Delete and Add Description icons.

Type the required values for the field and press the Enter key on the computer’s keyboard. This saves the field value in the box. Click on Apply in the Save or Cancel dialog window to save the ladder logic.

Continue adding/ editing rungs/ instructions to complete the ladder logic.

After creating/editing a ladder logic program using RSLogix500, the information must then be converted to a format recognized by the Alpha. First highlight all the rungs from top to bottom, then select Copy from the Edit menu.

Paste the information into a text editor. RSLogix500 adds characters to certain addresses which are carried over to the paste operation. The Alpha controller does not support these added characters. They must be removed or converted to the appropriate address before saving the file for use in the Alpha. See section “3.1.1.1 Wizard Screens” on page 39.

This must now be converted to a JSON file. Type the following BEFORE the first SOR in the pasted logic in the text editor: { CRLF TAB “plc”: TAB { CRLF TAB TAB “1”: TAB { CRLF TAB TAB TAB “700”: TAB “ Then type the following AFTER the last EOR in the pasted logic in the text editor: “, CRLF TAB TAB } CRLF TAB } CRLF }

Save the file using the .json extension and choose “All Files” under Save as type in the Save window.

Once the file is saved it can be put into the Alpha controller. See section “3.1.4.11 PLC Tab” on page 83.

To provide a version, put another JSON parameter tag after the logic or name tag and before the ending brackets. The new tag is”702”: “VERSION”. There is a 15 character limit to this parameter.

Expert and Specialist Alpha controllers can be managers (leaders) to twenty-three other Advanced or Node Alpha controllers or QPM Cordless tools (if the Expert or Specialist is a wireless version). An Ethernet cable connection between them creates a multiple spindle system. The lead Alpha controller manage all I/O connections and ladder logic for the multiple spindle system.

Advanced Alpha controllers can be managers (leaders) to one other Advanced or Node Alpha controller. The lead Alpha controller manage all I/O connections and ladder logic for the multiple spindle system.

The lead and trailing controllers are connected via a standard Ethernet cable to their Ethernet ports, or via IEEE 802.11b/g/n for a QPM Cordless Tool. They must follow all the same addressing requirements on this Spindle Network that a standard Ethernet network requires. For QPM Cordess Tools follow the pairing instructions in the QPM Cordless Tool manual otherwise to connect an Advanced and Node controllers to the lead controller connect the Ethernet cable as follows:

Expert and Specialist Alpha controllers, when used as a lead controller, do not require any setting to be changed to recognize a trailing spindle. Using the keypad or Alpha Toolbox on the trailing controller set the Obtain IP Address From Network parameter to YES, this is set to YES by default. Exit and save the setting. Next connect the lead controller to the trailing controller, at that point the lead Expert or Specialist will then provide the IP Addresses to the trailing controller.

Advanced controllers, when used as a lead spindle require manual pairing of the lead and trailing spindle, connect the Ethernet cable as shown.

Using the keypad, or Alpha Toolbox, on the leading (Advanced) and trailing (Advanced or Node) controller set the Obtain IP Address From Network parameter to NO. Then enter an IP Address and Subnet Mask values for both controllers. Remember to keep the IP Addresses similar but not exactly the same while keeping the Subnet Mask values the same. Type the IP Address of the lead controller into the LEAD IP ADDRESS parameter of the trailing controller. Exit and save the setting.

Once the trailing controller connects to the lead controller the user must acknowledge the addition. The lead controller will display the Add New Spindle dialog box. Select the spindle number for the added controller. Before acknowledgement the trailing controller trying to connect will: • flash the red, green and yellow status lights on the controller and the tool • flash the QPM light on the face of the controller and • display the Identify Spindle message window.

Press the Yes interactive menu button to accept the new spindle connection. Press the No interactive menu button to decline the new spindle connection. After connection the lead spindle will add the new spindle as a tab on the run screen. It will also add and select the ALL tab to show both spindles’ run screen on the lead controller.

See section “2.7 Display” on page 27 for a description of the elements on the run screen. Each spindle must be programmed individually. The ony way to copy programming from one spindle to another is to Export a Jobs file from one controller and Import it to another. To program the spindles from the keypad press the right or left arrow keys to select the desired spindle tab and program as normal. See section “3 Programming” on page 38. The All tab provides the SETUP interactive menu button. The User, Regional and Clock settings for all controllers move here. These settings are global for all controllers in the multiple spindle systems. On connection, or when they are changed, the lead controller’s users and passwords will overwrite the trailing controllers’ users and passwords to match. When the trailing spindle is disconnected it will retain the lead spindle’s users and passwords. Alpha Toolbox will also display all spindles on its Home screen.

See Section “4.3 Editing Parameters” on page 100 to edit the parameter via Alpha Toolbox. Once a specific controller is connected the lead controller will remember it. If the trailing spindle gets disconnected then reconnected there is no need to acknowledge the connection again. However, if a trailing controller is removed (forgotten) and a different controller is attached the different controller must then be acknowledged before it is added to the system. If a trailing controller is offline or disconnected the spindle’s tab on the lead controller’s display will turn red. The lost spindle’s display on Alpha Toolbox will turn red as well. When the spindle comes back online the red will turn to the normal color.

Use the right arrow to select the tab with the disconnected spindle. The color change to red and shows a ”Spindle Communication” Fault to make it obvious that the trailing spindle is not connected.

The lead controller’s QPM logo will blink if it had a trailing controller connected and the trailing controller goes offline or is disconnected. The trailing controller’s QPM logo will blink if it has a value in the Master IP Address parameter and is not connected to a controller with the specified IP Address.

Forget the trailing spindle to stop the logo from blinking on the lead controller. Delete any values in the Master IP Address in the trailing controller to stop the logo from blinking. See section “8.2 Disconnect” on page 177.

When the multiple spindle mode is no longer required remove the Ethernet cable between the two controllers. On the lead spindle navigate to the trailing spindle tab by pressing the right arrow while on the run screen. The disconnected spindle run screen is red. Press the FORGET interactive menu button to delete the trailing spindle connection. The Spindle Delete message appears. Press the Yes interactive menu button to delete the spindle.

The spindle deletes and the run screen will return to a normal single spindle run screen if that was the only trialing spindle. On the trailing spindle delete the values in the Master IP Address parameter, EXIT and save.

Many fastening situations require that two or more fasteners are secured simultaneously which even out the distributed clamp loads on each of the fasteners in the assembly. In a tool control controller such as the Alpha, this is known as synchronization. Expert, Specialist, Advanced, and Node Alpha controllers can synchronize its tool operation with other Alpha controllers over the spindle network so that they start each step of a multi-step strategy at the same time. QPM Cordless B-Series tools cannot be synchronized with other tools. The tools are synchronized so all spindles complete a given step before continuing on with the subsequent step(s).

When multiple Alpha controllers are synchronized, the tool strategy parameters are the same for each. This allows each fastener in the assembly to be driven to the final target in the same manner at a controlled pace. For each step to be synchronized the Delay Between Steps parameter must be greater than zero for each controller.

To synchronize the Alpha controllers simply assign a START input on the lead controller and configure the Spindle number as ALL.

• Never connect the SPINDLE port to a plant network.

The lead controller in a multiple spindle system can communicate to a plant network via the embedded protocols, see section “3.1.3 COMMUNICATIONS Menu” on page 60. The lead controller will collect and transmit the

fastening cycle data after each fastening cycle from each controller in the system via the selected protocol.

Connecting the multiple spindle lead Expert, Specialist, or Advanced controller to a facility network using the ETHERNET port. Use customer’s supplied values and enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway into the lead controller.

If required setup parameters for embedded protocols under Setup>Communications.

Data for each fastening cycle is entered as a line in the fastening cycle record in each controller in the system for its own spindle. However, when a system is ran in Synchornized mode the fastening cycle records get an additional column labled Mult ID. This Multi ID is the same in each spindle in the muti-tool system for the same fastening cycle ran. This allows the user to correlate the same run in each file.Operation The fixtured tools must be started with a remote start switch connected to the START input of the lead Alpha. The lead controller will apply a start to the synchronized trailing spindles in the system. When the remote start switch is depressed all tools will start. All tools will run the first step in the selected Job/ Task. Once each tool has completed the first step it will stop and wait for all tools to finish the step. If all tools finished the step OK then all tools start the next step in the multi-step strategy. This process continues until all steps are complete or any tool times out or is stopped or aborted. All multi-step rules still apply in that the tool must meet the programmed OK window to move on to the next step. If a tool fails a step it will stop which causes all other tools to stop immediately. Once they stop the In-Cycle indicator on the run screen will go away and a SYNC shutoff code is indicated for all controllers except the one that failed to complete a step OK. All tools will be stopped immediately if any single tool is stopped due to an abort event.

When in synchronization mode any Reverse, Job Select, Task Select or PartID input from any of the synchronized spindles will cause all spindles to react to the input. All spindles are required to maintain the same number of accumulated bolt count. If one spindle has a bolt count different from the other the controllers will not run from the START:ALL input. Individual spindles must be ran in recovery operations to get all spindles on the same bolt count to continue or reset the Job to recover.

There are no user serviceable components within the QB Alpha controller. That does not mean that there are no maintenance requirements or actions to be taken to insure optimal performance of the controller.

Store idle tools and controllers in a dry secure area. For maximum tool life, only use lubricants specified in the service instructions. Keep maintenance and repair records on all tools and controllers. Frequency of repair and nature of the repairs can reveal unsafe applications.

The modules require routine maintenance to insure optimal performance. On a monthly basis: • Visually inspect and tighten external connections. • Visually inspect all external cables for excessive wear, frayed wire, or breaks. Replace as needed.

Use the following diagnostics and troubleshooting guide to identify, isolate, and diagnose both mechanical and controller software related problems.

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Physical inspection: worn, frayed, or broken connections or wires

Tool cable Replace

Replace tool cable

Tool Replace/Repair Swap with known, good operating tool Replace/Repair tool

Verify and or adjust tool calibration factor(s) to match calibration factor(s) for tool. May require tool recertification.

Calibration Factors Verify/Adjust Zero or Span Fault

No bolt count on the Run screen for the selected Job/ Task

Create new strategy

Cycle Abort set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Cycle Abort

Torque Target set to zero (0) on torque control strategy

Set higher amount on Torque Target

Tool does not run

Strategy Verify/Adjust

Angle Target set to zero (0) on angle control strategy

Set higher amount on Angle Target

Tool Speed set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Tool Speed

Power set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Power

Acceleration set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Acceleration

See Fault Guide (Section “1.6.2 Electric Service Ratings” on page 20)

Fault Various errors Fault displayed on screen

See Message Guide (Section “1.5 Safety” on page 15)

Press and hold trigger and view message on display

STOP condition or input Remove STOP condition

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Physical inspection: incorrect wiring, termination, connections, devices or programming of I/O assignments

Repair/replace/ reprogram external input and output connections and wiring as necessary based on I/O drawings

External input connections Repair/replace/ reprogram

Tool does not run remotely

Lost + 24 V DC Power Supply Return for repair No or low voltage (<11V) between Pins A and V Return for repair

Power off Turn Alpha on

Power on Plug unit in

No power Restore power

Plugged in Check power at source

No lights, no display

AMP board Failure Return for repair Unit is on, plugged in, and there is power at the source Return for repair

Set Torque Audit Step and or Angle Audit Step on the actual desired audit step

Torque Audit Step and or Angle Audit Step set on undefined step

Completed Rundown - Zero for Torque and Angle Readings

Incorrect Audit Step Verify/Adjust

Set Threshold Torque to zero (0) or a value lower than final torque

Completed Rundown - No Torque and Angle Readings

Tool ran strategy but no fastening cycle values appear on display

Threshold Torque set too high Verify/Adjust

Low-torque reject. Snug Torque has been set to zero (0)

Incomplete rundown (AC/TM) Long bolt Verify/Adjust

Set higher amount on Snug Torque

Incomplete rundown (TC/AM) Prevailing Torque Verify/Adjust Parts changed. Low angle reject. Parts not snug

Insert a Self Tap step prior to audit step

Consistent high angle reject (TC/ AM) Long bolt Verify/Adjust Snug Torque has been left at default value

Set higher amount on Snug Torque

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Torque Target is close to High Torque

Increase High Torque

Consistent high torque reject (TC/ AM) Hard joint Verify/Adjust

Add a within step downshift or turn on ATC or ATC+ to the audit step

No downshift

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, repair it by replacing the motor or gearing or head.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

Overcurrent Fault!

Increase speed of tool, increase downshift speed, or remove downshift altogether. Create a Pre-torque step with a Delay Between Steps of at least 0.05 seconds. Change input voltage to 230 V AC

A larger tool is used with a long rundown or Downshift Speed set very low. Fluctuating incoming AC voltage as seen on the ANALYZE screen.

Fault condition resets when DC bus voltage is within limits.

Low DC bus voltage

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, repair it by replacing the motor.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

GFI Fault!

Use an ohmmeter or the motor tester to check: Phase-to-phase values; they should be equal. Phase-to-ground; they should be >2 Megohms.

Defective Tool Replace defective tool

Replace defective tool

Use a voltmeter to test for proper voltage WHILE the tool is running. Check for proper grounding at the receptacle.

Insufficient AC input power Repair incoming power system

Repair incoming power system

Logic Voltage Fault!

Defective triple power supply or logic board inside controller

Return controller for repair Logic Voltage Fault! appears on display Return for repair

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Exchanging known good tool can verify the tool is the cause of failure

Replace defective tool

Replace defective tool

Defective tool

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Position Feedback Fault!

Whip was removed from extension cable and connected directly to the controller, which then cleared the error

Reduce total cable length to < 60 meters

Fault condition resets when cable length is reduced.

Tool cable longer than 60 meters

Torque Cal. set to a non-standard value (i.e. greater than 20% variance from Nominal Cal. )

Read the Nominal Torque Cal. value from the tool and compare it to the specific Torque Cal.

Set Torque Cal. to the specific torque calibration value for the tool

May require tool recertification

Transducer Span Fault!

Wrong values indicated under SERVICE>TOOL screen

Wrong tool parameters in tool memory board

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Defective tool Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Torque Cal. set to a non-standard value (i.e. greater than 20% variance from Nominal Cal. )

Read the Nominal Torque Cal. value from the tool and compare it to the specific Torque Cal.

Set Torque Cal. to the specific torque calibration value for the tool

May require tool recertification

Remove the object wrapped around gear case. Open gear case and inspect for wrong components or components are in backward

Remove the object wrapped around gear case. Reassemble gear case with proper components.

Transducer Zero Fault!

ANALYZE screen shows a zero offset on the transducer health meter

Tool gear case binding

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Defective tool Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Modify Temperature parameter value. The maximum for handheld tools is 85˚C . The maximum for fixtured tools is 125 ˚ C.

Viewed Temperature value under SETUP-> OTHER-> TOOL tab and compared with Temperature value on ANALYZE screen

Wrong value in Temperature parameter

Modify Temperature parameter value

This error automatically resets when temperature drops and stays below trip point for 8 minutes on QPM tools. It can also be reset by cycling power, however, if the tool has not cooled down this error will reappear in 8 minutes. For fixtured tools turn off Soft Stop .

Tool is hot to touch and shuts down: QPM tools shutdown when tool internal temperature reaches and stays above programmed set point for 8 minutes

Excessive duty cycle Use a larger tool for the job

Temperature Fault!

To prevent an over temperature, modify the strategy by raising downshift speed or eliminating the downshift; Also try a multi-step strategy with a Delay Between Steps of at least 0.5 seconds. For fixtured tools turn off Soft Stop .

Tool is hot to touch and shuts down: QPM tools shutdown when tool internal temperature reaches and stays above programmed set point for 8 minutes

Contact STANLEY Assembly Technologies for help on modifying strategy

Inefficient Rundown Strategy

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Tool has operated without overheating for a significant period of time but suddenly overheats; operator notices change of tool operation (i.e., noise, vibration, and speed are different than normal)

Perform maintenance on tool; open and inspect tool head and gearing; replace any worn or broken parts

Open and inspect tool head and gearing; replace any worn or broken parts

Output / gearing failure

Temperature Fault! Continued

The type of joint (hard or soft) can cause (see Excessive Duty Cycle cause above); switch from 115 V AC to 230 V AC or correct reduced incoming voltage problem

When tested with a voltmeter, or as observed on the ANALYZE screen, incoming voltage is <90% of nominal

Switch from 115 V AC to 230 V AC or correct reduced incoming voltage problem

Reduced incoming voltage

Wrong values indicated under SERVICE-> TOOL screen

Unrecognized Tool! Wrong tool parameters in tool memory board

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, see the next row for troubleshooting and repair.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

Tool Communications!

Replace and reprogram the Tool Memory Board in the handle of the tool

Tool Memory Board failure Replace the Tool Memory Board Tool found to be defective

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Defective tool Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Check tool whip/ extension cable connections and ensure they are tight

No values indicated under SERVICE>TOOL screen

Tool not electrically connected to controller

Connect tool to controller

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, see the next row for troubleshooting and repair.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

Open tool handle and check transducer cable connections to ensure tightness and the wiring is not damaged. Remove motor housing sleeve and check blue transducer wire for damage. Remove the gear pack from the motor on the tool and replace the torque transducer; testing with a known good transducer connected to the tool before replacement helps determine which parts are faulty.

Transducer Current Fault!

View transducer health, current and torque output meters on ANALYZE screen and determine if values are in normal range. Tool found to be defective

Transducer / transducer cable within tool failure

Replace transducer / transducer cable in tool

Change tool to a type the controller can run. Look under SERVICE-> Controller for list of supported tools.

The wrong tool type has been connected to the controller.

Change tool to a type the controller can run.

Unsupported Tool! fault on display

Unsupported Tool!

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Reboot controller; keep controller off for at least 20 seconds

Reboot controller; keep controller off for at least 20 seconds

Controller Firmware has just been updated

Servo Connection Fault!

Servo Connection Fault! on display

Spindle Communications on display

Lead or trailing controller is off Turn lead or trailing controller on

Turn lead or trailing controller on

Controller is setup as a lead or trailing controller

Default the controller Controller is a single spindle Default the controller

Spindle Communications

Reconnect Ethernet cable between Lead and trailing controllers. If using external switches ensure they are energized.

Visual/Mechanical inspection to ensure cable connections are tight

Reconnect Ethernet cable between Lead and trailing controllers

Ethernet cable disconnected

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Cable has disconnected from controller or PI box Reconnect cable Visual inspection Reconnect cable

Communication Fault

Actual bolt count on display is less than required

Count Fault Operator backed out a fastener Re-fasten loosened fastener

Re-fasten loosened fastener

Operator performed a double hit or fastened more fasteners than was expected

Reset Job or loosen a secured fastener to return to the proper bolt count

Actual bolt count on display is more than required

Reset Job or loosen a fastened fastener

Program Fault

Download a new file and try to load it again

Tool Update Failed error message appears.

Download a new file and try to load it again

Tool INI file is corrupt

See Tool Communications! in section “9.2.1 Fault Guide” on page 184

See Tool Communications! in section “9.2.1 Fault Guide” on page 184

Tool Update Failed

Loss of communication between tool and controller

Tool Communications! fault on display

PLC Message The PLC is providing the message None PLC Message is displayed on controller Press OK

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Press OK. Delete the PLC file. Read the entire file and fix the syntax issue.

Invalid PLC File Bad command or syntax used in the PLC.json file

Read the entire file and fix the syntax issue

Invalid PLC File appears on display

Red, Greed, Yellow Status lights are blinking in sequence on trailing controller and tool with ‘Add Spindle’ dialog box on display of lead controller

Press OK. Choose a number and add the spindle

Trailing spindle is wanting to connect to lead controller

Choose a number and add the spindle

Identifying Spindle

Operator pressed the Identify button under ANALYZE Press OK Display on lead controller is on ANALYZE screen Press OK

Program the selected Task or select another Task that is already programmed

An unprogrammed Task has been selected

Select a different Task

A non-valid Job/ Task has been selected

Select a different Job/Task from 1 to 99

Select a different Job/Task

Tool Disabled

Have a valid part enter the station. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the controller.

Network needs to know that a valid unprocessed part has entered the station

Have a valid part enter the station

Select a new Job/ Task. Reset the Job.

Select a new Job/ Task. Reset the Job.

Accumulated bolt count is equal to Job/Task bolt count

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Remove the active input. Reassign input.

Remove the active input. Reassign input.

A input is applied that is assigned as STOP

Select a different Job/Task. Select a different socket for verification.

Select a different Job/Task. Select a different socket for verification.

Job/ Task Verify inputs not matching selected Job/ Task.

Wait until the controller has finished the boot up process

Wait until the controller has finished the boot up process

The controller is in the process of booting

Tool Disabled Continued

Wait for the timer to reset. Change the Cycle Lock-out timer value.

Wait for the timer to reset. Change the Cycle Lock-out timer value.

The Cycle Lock-out timer is active

Reject Count Exceeded Reset the Job

Reset the Job

Retrain operator on proper process to insure the internal PLC logic is met. Delete the PLC program.

Retrain operator on proper process to insure the internal PLC logic is met

Logic criteria not met for tool operation

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Press the MFB to arm the tool. Change the tool’s parameter to not require arming.

Tool is not armed Press the MFB to arm the tool

Tool Disabled Continued

Press the MFB to acknowledge and reset the NOK fastening cycle. Change the MFB parameter to not require Reset Reject.

Press the MFB to acknowledge and reset the NOK fastening cycle

A Reset Reject is active

Users may order installation and repair parts directly from STANLEY, or their agents.

Label, Warning, Pinch Point X5557

Label, Warning, Reaction Point X5571

Label, Warning, Tubenut X5556

Supplementary documentation to better understand the STANLEY QB Alpha Controllers, QPM EB, EA, EC, E-

Series corded tools, and QPM B-Series cordless tools.

For all STANLEY electric assembly tools, the angle information is based on the rotation of the resolver, which is directly attached to the rotor. This information is used for motor commutation, and it also serves as an angle encoder. The rotation of the tool output can be determined by dividing the rotor angle by the total gear ratio for the tool. All things can deflect when loaded. Just as a long steel bar attached to a socket to produce high torque will deflect, likewise the gears within an assembly tool will deflect when subjected to the torque loads. In effect, the gears act as a torsion spring between the rotor and the socket, and it is the deflection of this spring that can give false angle data. In addition to the angular deflection within the gears of the tool, there can also be deflection of the parts of the joint. Whenever this deflection is present in the tool or the joint or the tool mounting device, the angle information derived from the resolver will indicate a larger angle than the tool output actually rotates. This error is directly proportional to the torque level. That is, the deflection at 40 NM will be twice that at 20 NM. In a torque vs. angle curve of a fastening cycle, at the end when the torque reaches its maximum value, the angle will also be at its maximum value. After shut off, as the torque falls to zero, the angle should remain at its maximum value. But in the typical torque vs. angle curve, as the torque falls to zero, the angle also appears to fall some amount. This is not because the fastener is being loosened. It is actually the resolver indicating that the angular deflection of the gears is relaxing to the neutral position. In this case, the maximum angle indicated at the maximum torque was incorrect. The resolver indicated more angle than the tool output actually rotated. To correct for this slight error in angle data, the Alpha controller has a STANLEY-exclusive solution. The Torsion Factor allows the user to input a value that compensates for the torsional spring rate of any part of the fastening system (the gears of the tool, the joint components, or the tool mounting device), and this factor is used to correct the angle reading throughout the fastening cycle. This factor is entered as Degrees per NM, and its default value is zero. If the default value is used, there will be no angular correction. If a value of 0.1 is used, each angle data point (every millisecond) will be modified by subtracting 0.1 times the torque value. For example, at 15 NM, the controller will subtract 1.5 degrees from the angle reading for that sample. At 30 NM, the controller will subtract three degrees for that sample. The easiest way to determine the correct value for the Torsion Factor is to look at a torque vs. angle trace with Torsion Factor set to zero. The amount of degrees that the socket appears to loosen after the maximum torque, divided by that maximum torque is the Torsion Factor. For example, consider a torque vs. angle trace that indicates a maximum torque of 40 NM, and the maximum angle at this torque of 50 degrees. But the angle appears to loosen by four degrees as the torque drops to zero. The Torsion Factor can be determined by dividing four degrees by 40 NM to arrive at a Torsion Factor of 0.1 degrees per NM. When this value is entered into the Torsion Factor parameter, each angle reading will be corrected by this factor. When this factor is set correctly, any torque vs. angle trace will now indicate no apparent loosening of the fastener as the torque drops to zero after shut off; which is exactly as it should be.

Now that the angle can be indicated with great precision, the other challenge is to validate these results against an external torque/angle transducer with monitor. This is not as simple as setting both the controller and the monitor to the same snug torque and comparing the resulting angle. It has been found that a tool’s torque trace will never track exactly the same as the external. The calibration is only the average of a number of readings, generally at a high torque near the maximum capacity of the tool. When

This chapter promotes proper and safe use and gives guidance to owners, employers, supervisors and others responsible for training and safe use by operators. DC electric tools from STANLEY Assembly Technologies are intended for use in industrial threaded fastening or precision position and or adjustment applications only. Some instructions may not apply to all tools. Please contact your STANLEY Sales Engineer for information or assistance on STANLEY training for assembly tool operation.

Operating Conditions Temperature 32 to 122 ºF (0 to +50 ºC)

Humidity 0 to 95 % non-condensing

Noise Level: A-weighted emission sound pressure level at the work station < 70dBA (ref 20μPa) as determined according to ISO 15744-2002. Vibration Level: Weighted root mean square acceleration value at the handle < 2.5 m/s2 as determined according to ISO 8662. STANLEY ASSEMBLY TECHNOLOGIES hereby declares the following sound and vibration emission levels as required by the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC. A-weighted emission sound pressure level at the work station LpA (ref 20µPa) of < 70dBA. Value determined according to ISO 15744‑2002 * using as basic standards ISO 3744 and ISO 11203. Weighted emission root mean square acceleration level at the handle. Value determined according to ISO 8662 * (single axis) of < 2.5 m/s². * Operating conditions for all measurements: full rated speed, no load, rated supply voltage or pressure. A-weighted emission sound power level LWA: not required, declared sound pressure emission levels are below 85dBA. C-weighted peak emission sound pressure level LpCpeak: not applicable to these products. Uncertainty KpA, KWA, KpCpeak: not relevant, declared levels are maximum values.

are exposed to. The actual sound level an individual is exposed to and the individual’s exposure time over the work day are important factors in determining hearing protection requirements. Worker sound level exposure can only be determined at the job site and is the responsibility of tool owners and employers. Measure worker sound level exposure and identify high-risk noise areas where hearing protection is required. Follow federal (OSHA), state or local sound level statues, ordinances and or regulations.

Turn the controllers off when removing or attaching tools. STANLEY electric tools must be connected to a controller to operate. To ensure superior performance and safe operation, use a STANLEY controller specifically designed for each tool. These instructions are specific to STANLEY electric tools when used with STANLEY electric tool controllers and accessories. Some features may not be applicable, performance may be degraded and some safety systems may not be available when tools are connected to non-STANLEY controllers and accessories.

To install an accessory or bit , fully insert the accessory. The accessory is locked into place. To remove an accessory, pull the chuck collar away from the front of the tool. Remove the accessory.

Remove power before changing accessories. To install an accessory on the square drive, align the hole in the side of the accessory with the detent pin on the anvil square drive. Press the accessory on until the detent pin engages in the hole. Depression of detent pin may be necessary to aid installation of the accessory. To remove an accessory, depress the detent pin through the hole and pull the accessory off.

To ensure superior performance and safe operation, use the STANLEY cables specifically designed to operate these tools. Never use a tool with a damaged cable. Never abuse a cable, carry a tool by its cable or pull a cable to disconnect it. Also, keep the cord away from heat, sharp edges, or moving parts. Use cables of appropriate length (60M maximum) for each application; position and or suspend them in such a way as to prevent tripping and cable damage, and to provide good work area maneuverability.

Odometer Counter Records the total number of fastening cycle the tool has completed during its lifetime.

Trip Counter Records the number of fastening cycles the tool completed since the last reset to zero.

PM Counter Records the number of fastening cycles the tool completed since the last reset to zero. Interacts with PM Threshold.

PM Threshold A static value set by the end user. When the PM Counter exceeds the PM Threshold (Limit), the controller provides a maintenance alert. The alert is an orange indicator on the front of the controller and on the tool.

The controller reads the fastening cycle counters from the tool on each power up.

Green Tightened to specified limits The Fastening cycle meets all of the specified parameters.

Yellow Low torque or angle The Fastening cycle was rejected for not achieving either low torque or low angle.

Red High torque or angle The Fastening cycle was rejected for exceeding either high torque or high angle.

All lights Reverse The next time the start trigger is engaged the tool will remove the fastener.

Disable The button does nothing.

Pressing the button toggles between assembly and disassembly and illuminates the appropriate blue light [ 1 ] or [ 2 ]. All tool status lights [ 3 ] and [ 7 ] flash when the tool is in disassembly mode.

Reverse (Disassembly)

Job/Task Select Pressing the button toggles between Job/Task 1 and Job/Task 2 and illuminates the appropriate orange light [ 6 ] or [ 4 ].

Arm Pressing the button arms (activates) the trigger but does not start the tool. The blue assembly light [ 2 ] comes on to show that the tool is armed for three seconds.

Reset Reject This function, when selected, will cause the tool to disable after a NOK Fastening cycle. The Reject Tone, when enabled, will sound. Pressing the button re-enables the tool indicating the operator acknowledges the rejected Fastening cycle and wishes to repair it.

Job Reset Pressing the button causes the selected Job to be reset. This means that the fastener count is reset and the tool, if disabled due to Error Proofing requirements, re-enables.

This function, when selected, causes the tool to disable after a NOK Fastening cycle. The Reject Tone, when enabled, will sound. Pressing the button re-enables the tool in the Reverse direction and indicates that the operator acknowledges the rejected Fastening cycle and wishes to repair it. The tool switches to the forward direction after the controller detects a fastener has been removed.

Reset and Reverse

surface limit is 85°C.) Since the default limit is 85°C inside the tool regardless of ambient, no external surface can exceed this value no matter what the ambient temperature. STANLEY allows the temperature limit adjustment to provide flexibility to the professional user. Once a customer changes the setting from the factory default, it is their responsibility to ensure the safety of the user. Controller parameter settings can have a significant effect on tool operating temperatures.

The Alpha controllers can be setup to change tightening Jobs or Tasks from the tool’s MFB.

Exposed gear socket tools are designed to fit into tight spaces where other tools do not fit. These tools have exposed gears or ratchet teeth. It is recommended to use the MFB ARMING feature for these types of tools

Tubenut nutrunners are used for installing tube fittings.

Each Alpha Controller has a different combination of connectors. These connectors serve several purposes, such as: • Power • Tool Connections • Discrete inputs and outputs • Communications ports • Fieldbus ports

Alpha Controllers use an IEC 60320 style connector. The power source connector for the power cord is based on customer requirements. The power cord should be rated at either 15A/125V for 115V AC or 10A/250V for 230V AC power connections.

30-pin Tool Connector

30-pin Tool Connector

The USB connector is used for data transfer between a USB memory stick and the controller, controller upgrades and for receiving PART ID ASCII data from a USB barcode scanner. No mounting or unmounting of the memory stick is required. Simply insert a USB memory stick when requested and remove after the operation is complete. Do not energize the controller with a USB memory stick installed.

The barcode input monitors inter-character timing. When there is a 500 msec gap between characters, a complete barcode is assumed. When received, the controller logs it with all fastening cycles until another barcode is received or until the controller power is cycled. If the incoming barcode is longer than 32 characters, then the last 32 characters received are used.

Alpha controllers have one male DB-9 connector. The setup is 9600-baud rate, 8 data bits, No Parity and 1 Stop bit, and is not programmable except with the PLC. The connection between a device such as a computer and the controller is a null-modem cable. Communication functions can be selected for the serial port. See section “3.1.3.3 Serial Tab” on page 63.

DB-9 Connector Pins

Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function

1 Carrier Detect 4 Data Terminal Ready 7 Request to Send

2 Receive Data 5 Signal Ground 8 Clear to Send

3 Transmit Data 6 Data Set Ready 9 Ring Indicator

The controller uses only pins 2, 3, and 5. Fastening Cycle String: S01,JB01,  4.1,A,126.2,A,A,06/09/2008 10:20:19,                                , |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    |  |  |  |                       | |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    |  |  |   |                       barcode (32 characters) |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    |  |  |  second |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    |  |  minute |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    |  hour |    |     | |     | | |  |  |    year |    |     | |     | | |  |  day |    |     | |     | | |  month |    |     | |     | | overall status (A=OK, R=NOK) |    |     | |     | angle status (A=OK, H=HIGH, L=LOW) |    |     | |     angle result (last step ran or audit step whichever is smaller, fixed decimals) |    |     | torque status (A=OK, H=HIGH, L=LOW) |    |     torque result (last step ran or audit step whichever is smaller, decimals are tool/units dependant) |    job number spindle number (1=LEADING, 2=TRAILING)

The barcode input monitors inter-character timing. When there is a 500 msec gap between characters, a complete barcode is assumed. When received, the controller logs it with all fastening cycles until another barcode is received or until the controller power is cycled. If the incoming barcode is longer than 32 characters, then the last 32 characters received are used.

All Alpha controllers have one RJ-45 Ethernet connection located on the bottom of the controller for connecting to a computer for setup, diagnostics, upgrades and configurations with Alpha Toolbox. The Alpha Toolbox Ethernet Connector is connected to internal DHCP and DNS servers. When a computer is connected via an Ethernet cable to the Alpha Toolbox connector the Alpha will give the computer an IP and other addresses to create its own network. The computer must be setup to recieve its IP Address from the Network. Once the computer has received and set the IP Address open a browser and type http://ATB.QPM into the URL line. The controller will serve the Alpha Toolbox web pages to the computer’s browser.

Expert and Specialist Alpha controllers have two RJ-45 Ethernet connections located on the bottom of the controller for connecting to a facility network or spindle network. The facility network can consist of the controller and a PC or a plant-wide fastening network. The second Ethernet connector is available to provide connections to another Alpha to create a spindle network. The single IP Address entered in the TCP/IP tab under Communications is for the facility network ETHERNET port. It is not required for users to know the static IP Address of the SPINDLE port as it is a separate network and controlled by the Expert.

Advanced and Node Alpha controllers have two RJ-45 Ethernet connections located on the bottom of the controller forconnecting to a data collection or spindle network. The data collection network can consist of the controller anda PC or a plant-wide fastening network. The second Ethernet connector is available to provide connections to another Alpha to create a spindle network. The single IP Address entered in the TCP/IP tab under Communicationsis for the network ETHERNET port and the SPINDLE port.

Standard + and Network Node Alpha controllers do not connect to a plant network, nor does it have the

industry standard Ethernet protocols or RJ-45 Ethernet connections besides the one used for Alpha Toolbox.

The following virtual ports are used for the various protocols of the controller:

Port Use Listen/Trans- mit Internet Protocol Description

80 HTTP Listen/transmit TCP/IP Browser access to the embedded web server for configura- tion and analysis; browser can use port proxy.

502 ModbusTCP Listen/transmit TCP/IP ModbusTCP I/O traffic

4545 OPEN Listen/transmit TCP/IP OPEN protocol traffic; port is assignable by end user.

4700 XML Com- mand Listen TCP/IP XML commands to controller; port is assignable by end user.

4710 XML Result Transmit TCP/IP XML response from controller; port is assignable by end user.

6575 Toolsnet Listen/Transmit TCP/IP Toolsnet protocol traffic; port is assignable by end user.

≥ 10000 PFCS Listen/Transmit TCP/IP PFCS messaging traffic in Chrysler facilities

The Alpha controller listens on the ports specified but transmits on any available port to the port specified of the target computer. The ETHERNET port uses 10/100 MBaud auto-select.

Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Ethernet/IP or Profinet Ports are present on Alpha controllers only when the option is installed. Ethernet/IP or Profinet configured Alpha controllers have two RJ-45 Ethernet connections located on the bottom of the controller for connecting to an Ethernet/IP or Profinet network when the option is ordered. The two ports are connected internally and have the same IP Address. Two ports are provided so that controllers may be daisy-chained together to create the fieldbus network rather than sending a cable from each controller back to a switch.

Ethernet/IP or Profinet Controller Network

Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha controllers can have a single Mini DeviceNet™ port, if this option is configured, for connecting the Alpha Controller to a Leading controller such as a PLC.

Pin Trailing

1 Drain

4 CAN H

Alpha Controllers Mini DeviceNet™ Connector

5 CAN L

Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha Controllers can have a single Profibus port, if this option is configured, for connecting the Alpha Controller to a Leading Profibus controller from another manufacturer.

Figure 5‑1 DB-9 Connecter Pins (Profibus Connector)

Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function

1 Empty 4 Repeater 7 Blank

2 Empty 5 Data Ref 8 Data Line Inverse

3 Data Line 6 Power Supply 9 Empty

Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha controllers can have a single Micro DeviceNet™ port , if this option is configured, for connecting peripheral devices to the Alpha Controller as a Leading controller. The assignable I/O and the embedded PLC can be programmed to run the peripheral devices.

Pin Leading

1 Drain

4 CAN H

Alpha Controllers Micro DeviceNet™ Connector

5 CAN L

Expert, Specialist, Advanced, Network Node, and Standard + Alpha controllers contain a 24V DC Input and Output Connector. All eight inputs and eight outputs are isolated 24V DC relays and contacts. The Alpha has an internal 24V DC power supply that can be used to provide the I/O signals; an external 24V DC power supply may be used instead. The following are amperage ratings: Internal 24V DC supply: Maximum = 1 ampere total External 24V DC supply: Maximum = 1 ampere per output The Alpha controller’s Input circuits conform to the IEC 61131-2 standard for PLCs.

LIMITS per IEC 61131-2

Type 2 limits

Rated Voltage

State 0 Transition State 1

Limit

V low (v) I low (ma) V trans (v) I trans (ma) V high (v) I high (ma)

24 volt Max 5 30 11 30 30 30

Min -3 ND 5 2 11 6

The Alpha controller has a MIL-C-26482 Series I plug connector with cable clamp and solder cup pins. NOTE: One I/O mating connector (P/N 21C104800) is included with each Alpha controller. Optional crimp style mating connectors, crimp tools, round connector-to-terminal strip and pig-tail I/O cables are also available.

Part No. 19-pin 24V I/O Port Included

21C104800 Mating Connector - Solder pins Standard

21C104802 Mating Connector - Crimp pins Optional

21C104804 Mating Connector - Crimp pins, crimp tool Optional

21E102202 Breakout Box for plinth mounting Optional

21C202005 I/O Cable 5M Optional

21C202010 I/O Cable 10M Optional

21C202020 I/O Cable 20M Optional

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U V

21C2020XX schematic

When the Alpha controller is used with fixtured tools, it must use a Remote Start/Stop/Reverse pendent to the

controller to provide basic switching control for the tool. Pin descriptions are shown in the following table:

Pin # Description PLC Address Pin # Description PLC Address

C Output O:0.0/0 L Input I:0.0/0

D Output O:0.0/1 M Input I:0.0/1

E Output O:0.0/2 N Input I:0.0/2

F Output O:0.0/3 P Input I:0.0/3

G Output O:0.0/4 R Input I:0.0/4

H Output O:0.0/5 S Input I:0.0/5

J Output O:0.0/6 T Input I:0.0/6

K Output O:0.0/7 U Input I:0.0/7

A 24 VDC N/A V 24 VDC Return N/A

B Output Supply N/A

(example)

Expert, Specialist, Advanced, Network Node, and Standard + Alpha controllers contain a 24V DC Input and Output Connector. The following Input/ Output (I/O) functions apply to the 24V DC I/O connector. There is a maximum of eight inputs and eight outputs for the 24V DC I/O connector. There is a maximum of 512 bytes of input and 512 bytes of output on each type of Fieldbus used with the controller (except DeviceNet with a limit of 256 bytes for both inputs and outputs). Ninety-nine is the maximum number of I/O functions that can be assigned to each Fieldbus input or output. Each I/O function can have a length of 1 to 32 bits. You must keep track of the lengths for each I/O function you assign to stay within the maximum length of the Fieldbus you are using. More than one Fieldbus connection can be used at the same time. For instance, the Alpha controller can use the 24V DC I/O connector AND ModbusTCP on Ethernet AND DeviceNet all at the same time. If more than one type of Input uses a particular function, the controller responds to an input when a function is asserted on any one of those inputs. It is important to understand how the Alpha controller, and the internal PLC, responds to the rising and falling edges of input functions as they are asserted or removed, not while the levels are high or low. The STOP bit is an exception; it is a true OR function rather than working off the transition. One type of Input does not have priority over the other. The controller responds to the first change in status of an input function, no matter which Fieldbus connection makes the change. If more than one Fieldbus shares a particular output function, that function is asserted on all shared fieldbuses. The table below lists the available input and output functions, gives a brief description and indicates the configuration options for each. The configuration options are an important aspect of the I/O functions, as they add powerful, multiple dimensions to each function in the controller. These new dimensions allow integration of the controller in unique ways, providing increased flexibility. Please see the full description of each function in the section following this table.

Inputs Description Configuration Options

DISABLE JOB Disable the job Contact Type, Job, Spindle

DISABLE TASK Disable the task Contact Type, Task, Spindle

DISABLE TOOL Disable tool (will complete running if it is in cycle) Contact Type , Spindle

IGNORED Input is not used Input is not assigned

JOB VERIFY Verify the selected job to the inputs Contact Type, Job, Spindle

JOB VERIFY (BIT) Verify the selected job to one of the input bits in a series Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

PART ID Sets the part identification Length, Trigger, Spindle

RESET JOB Reset a job Contact Type , Spindle

RESET RESULT STATUS Clear the result status Contact Type , Spindle

REVERSE Put the tool in reverse Contact Type , Spindle

SELECT JOB Select a job Contact Type, Job, Disable when open, Spindle

SELECT JOB (BIT) One bit in a series to select the job Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

SELECT TASK Select a task Contact Type, Task, Disable When Open, Spindle

SELECT TASK (BIT) One bit in a series to select the task Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

SET ZERO POSITION Used to set Zero Position for Position Control Strategy Contact Type, Spindle

START Start the tool Contact Type, Latch, Time, Spindle

Inputs Description Configuration Options

START REVERSE Put the tool in reverse and start the tool Contact Type , Spindle

STOP Stop the tool Contact Type , Spindle

TASK VERIFY Verify the selected task to the inputs Contact Type, Task, Spindle

TASK VERIFY (BIT) Verify the selected task to one of the input bits in a series Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

* Input not available on 24V

Outputs Description Configuration Options

*ANGLE Angle result value Data Type, Step, Spindle

ANGLE HIGH Fastening cycle Angle exceeded High limit Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

ANGLE LOW Fastening cycle Angle under Low limit Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

ANGLE OK Fastening cycle Angle was within limits Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

*ANGLE STATUS Angle status of last fastening cycle Data Type, Step, OK, Low, High, Spindle

*BOLT Active Accumulated Bolt Count Data Type, Spindle

*CONSTANT User defined value Data Type, Constant

CYCLE ABORTED The fastening cycle was aborted/stopped Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

CYCLE NOK Fastening cycle was NOK Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

Outputs Description Configuration Options

CYCLE OK Fastening cycle was OK Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

CYCLE STOPPED Shut off code is STOP Contact Type, Time, Spindle

DISASSEMBLY DETECTED A tightened fastener removed has been loosened Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

*FAULT CODE Fault code value Data Type, Spindle

FAULTED A fault condition is active Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

GREEN LIGHT Mimics the Green Light on the controller Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

IN CYCLE The tool is in cycle Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

IN REVERSE The tool mode is Reverse Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

JOB COMPLETE Job complete, all bolts may not be OK Contact Type, Type, Time, Job, Spindle

JOB OK (All bolts in job are OK Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

JOB SELECTED Indicates a specific job is selected Contact Type, Type, Time, Job, Spindle

JOB SELECTED (BIT) A bit to indicate the selected job in a series of bits Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

MULTI-FUNCTION BUTTON Shows the state of the multifunction button Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

NOT USED Output is not in use None

*PARAMETER Parameter number Data Type, Param, Step, Spindle

*PART ID Active PART ID Data Type, Spindle

Outputs Description Configuration Options

PM The tool requires service Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

READY The tool is ready to run Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

RED LIGHT Mimics the Red Light on the controller Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

*RUNDOWN BOLT Accumulated Bolt Count of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN DAY Day of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN HOUR Hour of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN JOB Job of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN MINUTE Minute of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN MONTH Month of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN PART ID Last fastening cycle PART ID Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN SECOND Second of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN STATUS Overall status of last fastening cycle Data Type, OK, NOK, Spindle

*RUNDOWN TASK Task of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN UNITS Torque Units of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

*RUNDOWN YEAR Year of last fastening cycle Data Type, Spindle

SNUG ACHIEVED Is set when Snug torque exceeded Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

START TRIGGER Shows the state of the tool trigger Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

STEP BIT Indicates last step of fastening cycle in a series of bits Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

Outputs Description Configuration Options

STOPPED A STOP input is asserted Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

TASK COMPLETE Task complete (all bolts in task are OK) Contact Type, Type, Time, Task, Spindle

TASK SELECTED Indicates a specific task is selected Contact Type, Type, Time, Task, Spindle

TASK SELECTED (BIT) A bit to indicate the selected task in a series of bits Contact Type, Bit, Mode, Spindle

TOOL RUNNING The tool is running Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

*TORQUE Torque result value Data Type, Step, Spindle

TORQUE HIGH Fastening cycle Torque exceeded High limit Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

TORQUE LOW Fastening cycle Torque under Low limit Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

TORQUE OK Fastening cycle Torque was within limits Contact Type, Type, Time, Step, Spindle

TORQUE STATUS Torque status of last fastening cycle Data Type, Step, OK, Low, High, Spindle

YELLOW LIGHT Mimics the Yellow Light on the controller Contact Type, Type, Time, Spindle

* Outputs not available on 24 VDC

Expert, Specialist, Advanced, Network Node, and Standard + Alpha controllers contain a 24V DC Input and Output Connector. Each of the single bit input functions has a Configuration setting of Contact Type. The Contact

Type can be Normally Open (N.O.) or Normally Closed (N.C.). If an input’s contact type is normally open, the input is asserted when 24V DC is applied to the 24V DC connector input pin, or when the fieldbus bit transitions from low to high. If an input’s contact type is normally closed, the input is asserted when 24V DC is removed from the 24V DC connector input pin, or when the fieldbus bit transitions from high to low. The Input functions assert on the transition only. Job or Task selection can come from multiple inputs at once, including the MFB. There is no priority, each one is equal. The Alpha controller switches its active Job or Task with each input change. The last one to change becomes the active Job or Task. Spindle – Indicates to which spindle in the multi-spindle system this function applies.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the controller disables the tool while this specific job is selected. This acts like a STOP to stop the tool during use. Use the JOB parameter under Configuration to select the job to be disabled while this input is asserted.

When removed the tool will be allowed to run while this specific job is selected.

Size: 1 bit

DISABLE JOB

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Job: Type the job number to select when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the Job is to be disabled.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the tool is disabled while this specific task is selected. This acts like a STOP to stop the tool during use. Use the Task parameter under Configuration to select the disabled task.

When removed, the tool will be allowed to run while this specific task is selected.

Size: 1 bit

DISABLE TASK

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Task: Type the task number to disable when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the Task is to be disabled.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller prevents the tool from running. It does NOT stop the tool if the tool is running, but prevents it from running when the next START signal is applied. The START input can come from any bus or the tool trigger.

When removed the tool is allowed to run after the next START input.

DISABLE TOOL

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the tool is to be disabled.

IGNORE The input is not used. This is a placeholder. For fieldbus, the length of this input function may be set to any size that meets the need.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected job number is equal to this input’s job number. Use the JOB parameter under Configuration to select the job number to verify. If the wrong job is selected the tool is disabled.

When removed, verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit

JOB VERIFY

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Job: Type the job number to verify when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the job is to be verified.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected and active job is equal to this input’s job. Use the BIT parameter under Configuration to select the job number to verify. If there is a mismatch between the active job number and this input’s job number the tool is disabled. This is one bit of a binary number created by many of these bits. See SELECT TASK BIT to understand how to use bits to create binary numbers.

When removed verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

JOB VERIFY BIT

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit to be in the binary number scheme to verify a job.

Mode: All JOB VERIFY BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) plus 1.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the job is to be verified.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any fieldbus input, the controller reads the new PART ID input and places the data into the Part ID buffer. This is added to the fastening cycle data and stored in the controller. This input function is NOT available on the 24V DC input bus.

Size: Can be any size from 1 to 32 bytes.

*PART ID

When removed nothing happens.

Configuration:

Length: Type the length of the expected data string in bits.

Spindle: Type the spindle number to receive the PART ID data.

When asserted, on any input, the controller resets the accumulated bolt count to zero for the active job and acts as a part entry to re-enable the tool if disabled. The tool could be disabled due to “Error Proofing” and the accumulat- ed bolt count equal to target bolt count.

When removed nothing happens.

RESET JOB

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the job is to be reset.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller resets to 0 (zero) any fastening cycle results status output bit on the same bus. Meaning, if asserted on DeviceNet, only the DeviceNet output status bits are reset. Output status bits on other buses will remain in their original state.

The list of status bits that will reset are:

CYCLE OK CYCLE NOK

TORQUE OK TORQUE HIGH

TORQUE LOW ANGLE OK

ANGLE HIGH ANGLE LOW

RESET RESULT STATUS

CYCLE ABORTED CYCLE STOP

CURRENT OK CURRENT HIGH

CURRENT LOW

When removed nothing happens.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the result status is to be reset.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the tool is placed in Reverse (disassembly) mode. This does NOT run the tool in Reverse mode, it changes the tool mode from Forward to Reverse. If one input is required to do both functions, see REVERSE START.

When removed, from any input type, the controller places the tool into Forward (assembly) mode.

REVERSE

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for the tool to be put into reverse.

Inputs Description

When asserted, on any input type, the controller makes this input’s Job the active Job.

When removed either nothing happens or if “Disable when open” is set to yes, then the tool becomes disabled.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SELECT JOB

Job: Type the job number to select when this input is asserted.

Disable when open:

Yes – Disables the tool when this input is removed.

No – Does not disable the tool upon input removal.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the job is to be selected.

When asserted or removed on any input type, the controller selects a job. This is one bit, in a series of bits, to create a binary number.

See SELECT TASK (BIT) function description for explanation of this bit (note that this references Jobs not Tasks).

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SELECT JOB (BIT)

Bit: Type the number of this bit, in the binary number scheme, to select jobs.

Mode: All JOB SELECT BITs must be the same mode, modes cannot be mixed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and adds the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the job is to be selected.

When asserted, on any input type, the controller makes this input’s Task the active Task.

When removed either nothing happens or if “Disable when open” is selected as yes, then the tool becomes dis- abled.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SELECT TASK

Task: Type the Task number to select when this input is asserted.

Disable when open:

Yes – Disables the tool when this input is removed.

No – Does not disable the tool upon input removal.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the task is to be selected.

Inputs Description

When asserted or removed, on any input bus, the controller selects a Task. This is one bit, in a series of bits, to create a binary number.

The number created by this and other SELECT TASK BITs determines the active task for the tool. More than one input assigned as a TASK SELECT BIT creates a number greater than one. The maximum number of tasks required determines the maximum number of these inputs.

In binary numbers, the digit furthest to the right is the ones digit. The next digit to the left is the twos digit, next is the fours digit, then the eights digit, and so on. The integer equivalent to a binary number can be found by summing all the weighted values of the selected digits. For example, the binary number 10101 is equivalent to the integer 21. The math is 1 + 4 + 16 = 21: the high digits (one) are added together and the low digits (zero) are ignored.

Bit Number 4 3 2 1 0

Weighted Value 16 8 4 2 1

Binary Number 1 0 1 0 1

SELECT TASK (BIT)

24V DC Pins (example) R P N M L

To select task #21 on the controller at least five inputs are assigned as TASK SELECT (BIT). Each would then be given a bit number to have a series of bits with different weighted values. For example, on the 24 VDC input pin L is bit 0, pin M is bit 1, pin N is bit 2, pin P is bit 3, and pin R is bit 4. Therefore, to select task #21, assert pins L, N and R.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number of this bit, in the binary number scheme, to select tasks.

Mode: All TASK SELECT BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and adds the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the task is to be selected.

When asserted, on any Input type, the Zero Position for the tool is set. This Zero Position is used in the Position Control strategy to stop the tool at the Zero Position after meeting the Snug Torque value.

Size: 1 bit

SET ZERO POSITION

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the Zero Positions is to be set.

Inputs Description

When asserted, on any input type, the tool starts and runs the currently selected job/task. This input is overridden by the STOP input. If STOP is used and a tool restart is required, remove the STOP, remove the START, then re-assert the START. If the tool is required to operate in Disassembly mode, remove the START, assert the REVERSE input, and then re-assert the START.

When removed, from any bus of Input, the tool stops. Even if a second START input is active, the tool stops when any START is removed.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

START

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Latch: This is applicable to external inputs only. This is not applicable to the trigger on the tool handle.

Yes – Causes the START input to latch internally after a time period has elapsed. The physical START input can be removed without stopping the tool. The tool runs until all steps in the active task are complete or time out. A TIME parameter is available to set how long the START input must be applied, in seconds, before the Latch becomes active.

No – The Latch function is off.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for tool to be started.

When asserted on any input bus, the tool mode is switched to Reverse (Disassembly) AND the tool is started. This is different from the REVERSE input function in that REVERSE puts the tool into Reverse mode only.

When removed the tool stops and switches back to Forward mode.

START RE- VERSE

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for tool to be reversed.

When asserted, on any input type, the controller stops the tool. It also prevents the tool from running while it is applied.

When removed nothing happens other than the tool runs.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for tool to be stopped.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected and active task is equal to this input’s task. Use the TASK parameter under Configuration to select the task number to verify. If the wrong task is selected the tool is disabled.

When removed, verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit

TASK VERIFY

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Task: Type the task number to verify when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the task is to be verified.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected task number is equal to this input’s task num- ber. Use the BIT parameter under Configuration to select the task number to verify. If there is a mismatch between the active task and the selected task the tool is disabled. This is one bit of a binary number created by many of these bits. See SELECT TASK BIT to understand how to use bits to create binary numbers.

When removed verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be size any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

TASK VERIFY BIT

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit will be in the binary number scheme to verify a task.

Mode: All TASK VERIFY BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and add the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the task is to be verified.

* Outputs not available on 24 VDC

Expert, Specialist, Advanced, Network Node, and Standard + Alpha controllers contain a 24V DC Input and Output Connector. Each of the output functions has Configuration settings: Contact types, Output types and others. It is recommended to configure them immediately once the output functions are assigned to a pin. Contact Type The Contact Type can be Normally Open (N.O.) or Normally Closed (N.C.). Sourcing Outputs (PNP type) If an output’s contact type is normally open and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 0V DC to 24V DC. If an output’s contact type is normally closed and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 24V DC to 0V DC. Sinking Outputs (NPN type) If an output’s contact type is normally open and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 24V DC to 0V DC. If an output’s contact type is normally closed and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 0V DC to 24V DC. Output Type The Output Type defines the behavior of the output signal. Normal – The output asserts and stays asserted until a reset condition occurs. Minimum On Time – Keeps the output asserted for this minimum time in seconds, even though a reset condition occurs. After the timer is finished, the output resets if a reset condition has occurred, otherwise it remains asserted until a reset condition occurs. Timed – The output asserts for this period of time, then resets on its own without waiting for the reset condition to occur. Time – Units are in seconds. Flash – The output flashes for as long as it is asserted. Period – Sets the flashing on and off times, which are equal. Units are in seconds Spindle – Indicates from which spindle in the multi-spindle system this function comes.

Outputs Description

This output is the peak achieved angle value during the fastening cycle from the Audit step. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*ANGLE

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle value comes.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved angle value is above the High Angle limit for the Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

ANGLE HIGH

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved angle value is below the Low Angle limits for the Au- dit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

ANGLE LOW

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved angle value is within limits for the Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

ANGLE OK

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

Outputs Description

This output will be one of three selections. The selections are the User Defined Value for the associated angle status of the last fastening cycle. For example: if the last fastening cycle’s angle status was Low, and the User Defined Value for Low is -, then this output value is-.

The OK User Defined Value is selected when the achieved angle for the defined Step are within specified limits.

The Low User Defined Value is selected when the achieved angle for the defined Step is below the Low Angle limit.

The High User Defined Value is selected when the achieved angle, for the defined Step, is above the High Angle limit.

It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

*ANGLE STATUS

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

OK: User Defined Value

Low: User Defined Value

High: User Defined Value

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

This output is the value of the active accumulated bolt count. As the bolt count changes so does this output.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

*BOLT

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the bolt status comes.

Outputs Description

This value is defined by the end user in the Constant parameter. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*CONSTANT

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Constant: Type the value of the constant required

Asserts when the controller shuts the tool off due to a fault or if the Stop/Abort within Limits parameter is used and the fastening cycle has a shutoff code of ABORT. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE ABORTED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the abort status comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and/or angle for the Audit step are NOT within specified limits. Also asserts when the Stop/Abort within Limits parameter is set to Yes and the tool is stopped or aborted within limits. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE NOK

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and angle for the Audit step are within specified limits. Will not assert if the Stop/Abort within Limits parameter is set to Yes and the tool is stopped or aborted within limits. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE OK

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the tool shuts off due to a loss of Start signal or the operator released the trigger before the target was achieved. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE STOPPED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Asserts when the tool is running in Reverse and the achieved torque value exceeds the Threshold Torque value through some rotation. Resets when the tool is stopped.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

DISASSEMBLY DETECTED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the disassembly status comes.

Outputs Description

This output is the number value of the fault code present in the controller. It asserts when a fault is active and resets when the fault clears. The values are as follows:

1 – Overcurrent Fault! 2 – Logic Voltage Fault!

3 – Position Feedback Fault! 4 – Transducer Span Fault!

5 – Temperature Fault! 6 – Unrecognized Tool!

7 – Tool Communications! 8 – Transducer Current Fault!

9 – Transducer Zero Fault! 10 – Unused

11 – Unused 12 – Unused

*FAULT CODE

13 – Unsupported Tool! 14 – GFI Fault!

15 – Servo Connection Fault!

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the fault code comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when there is a fault on the controller. Resets when the fault clears.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

FAULTED

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the fault comes.

Mimics the Green status lights on the tool.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

GREEN LIGHT

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Asserts during the fastening cycle when the achieved torque value exceeds the Threshold Torque value. Resets when the fastening cycle has ended.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

IN CYCLE

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the tool’s operation is set to Reverse. Resets when the tool’s operation is set to Forward.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

IN REVERSE

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when a job is completed (accumulated bolt count equals target bolt count). NOTE: not all bolts may be OK. Resets when a different job is selected or when the input RESET JOB is asserted.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

JOB COMPLETE

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a job is completed (accumulated bolt count equals target bolt count) and all bolts are OK. Resets when a different job is selected or when the input RESET JOB is asserted.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

JOB OK

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a job is selected by any means. Resets when the active job is complete.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

JOB SELECTED

Job: Type the job number that, when selected, asserts this output.

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when required to indicate the active job. This is one bit in a series of bits to create a binary number. As jobs change so will the binary number created from these bits.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit to be in the binary number scheme for selected jobs.

JOB SELECTED BIT

Mode: All JOB SELECTED BITs must be the same mode, modes cannot be mixed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and adda the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the tool’s Multi-function Button is pressed. Resets when the Multi-function Button is released.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

MULTI-FUNCTION BUTTON

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

NOT USED The output is not used. This is essentially a placeholder.

For fieldbus, the length of this input function may be set to any size that meets the need.

This output is the value of the selected Parameter. It changes when the parameter changes.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

*PARAMETER

Parameter: Strategy, Torque Target, High Torque, Low Torque, Angle Target, High Angle, Low Angle, Snug Torque, Speed, Step Name, Torque Cal, Tool Serial Number, Torque Bailout, Angle Bailout, Downshift Torque, Downshift Speed, Tool Model Number, Task Name, Job Name, Task Bolt Count.

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This value is equal to and changes as the PART ID input changes.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

*PART ID

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when the Preventive Maintenance Count in the tool’s memory has exceeded the Preventive Mainte- nance Threshold. Resets when the Preventive Maintenance Count is reset to zero.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when there is no fault on the controller and the tool is ready to run. This output resets when the tool is disabled. The blue light on the controller and tool will illuminate when this output is on.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

READY

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Mimics the Red status lights on the tool.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

RED LIGHT

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Outputs Description

This is the accumulated bolt count value of the last fastening cycle. It asserts when the fastening cycle is com- plete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN BOLT

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the day value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN DAY

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the hour value of the last fastening cycle time. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN HOUR

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This value indicates the job in which the last fastening cycle was performed. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN JOB

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the minute value of the last fastening cycle time. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN MINUTE

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This is the month value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN MONTH

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This is the PART ID value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN PART ID

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the second value of the last fastening cycle time. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN SECOND

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This output will be one of two selections. The selections are the User Defined Value for the associated status of the last fastening cycle. For example: if the last fastening cycle status was OK, and the User Defined Value for OK is Good, then this output value is Good.

The OK User Defined Value asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and angle for the Audit step are within specified limits.

The NOK User Defined Value asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and angle for the Audit step are NOT within specified limits.

The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

*RUNDOWN STATUS

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

OK: User Defined Value

NOK: User Define Value

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This value indicates the task in which the last fastening cycle was performed. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN TASK

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This is the numeric equivalent value of the torque units of the last fastening cycle. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

The numeric equivalent values are:

0 – NM

1 – FTLB

2 – INLB

3 – INOZ

*RUNDOWN UNITS

4 – KGM

5 - KGCM

6 – NCM

7 – NDM

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the year value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN YEAR

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle if the achieved torque value exceeds the Snug Torque value during the fastening cycle. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SNUG ACHIEVED

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when the tool’s trigger is pressed. Resets when the tool trigger is released.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

START TRIGGER

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of the fastening cycle to indicate the last step ran. This is one bit, in a series of bits, to create a binary number.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit will be in the binary number scheme for steps.

STEP (BIT)

Mode: All STEP BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and add the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the STOP input is received, or anytime the tool is stopped. Resets when the STOP input or the Stop Tool Operation is reset. The

icon is on when this output is on.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

STOPPED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a task is complete (all bolts assigned to task are OK). Resets when a task is selected.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TASK COMPLETE

Task: Type the task number that, when completed, asserts this output.

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a task is selected by any means. Resets when the active task is complete.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TASK SELECTED

Task: Type the task number that, when selected, asserts this output.

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when required to indicate the active task. This is one bit in a series of bits to create a binary number. As tasks change so will the binary number created from these bits.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TASK SELECTED BIT

Bit: Type the number this bit will be in the binary number scheme for selected tasks.

Mode: All TASK SELECTED BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and add the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal come s.

Asserts anytime the tool is energized. Resets when the tool is commanded to stop.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

TOOL RUNNING

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This output is the peak achieved torque value during the fastening cycle from the Audit step. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

*TORQUE

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal come s.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque value is above the High Torque limit for the Au- dit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TORQUE HIGH

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque value is below the Low Torque limits Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TORQUE LOW

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal come s.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque value is within limits for the Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TORQUE OK

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This output will be one of three selections. The selections are the User Defined Value for the associated torque status of the last fastening cycle. For example: if the last fastening cycle’s torque status was High, and the User Defined Value for High is +, then this output value is +.

The OK User Defined Value is selected when the achieved torque for the defined step are within specified limits.

The Low User Defined Value is selected cycle when the achieved torque for the defined Step is below the Low Torque limit.

The High User Defined Value is selected when the achieved torque for the defined step is above the High Torque limit.

It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

* TORQUE STATUS

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

OK: User Defined Value

Low: User Defined Value

High: User Defined Value

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Mimics the Yellow status lights on the tool.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

YELLOW LIGHT

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Outputs Description

* Outputs not available on 24 VDC

The fieldbus Modbus TCP comes as a standard feature on the Ethernet port in Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha controllers. This is a Modbus variant used for communications over TCP/IP networks, connecting over virtual port 502. By default the Modbus TCP fieldbus does not have any I/O assigned. See section “3.3.7 I/O Tab” on page 96 to learn how to edit the I/O. See section “6.12 Assignable Input and Output Functions” on page 130 to learn about the values to edit. There is no configuration or programming specifically for the Modbus protocol itself. The Alpha’s CPU takes care of all the protocol’s overhead and handshaking requirements. The QB Alpha controllers supports the following public Modbus function codes: 01 (0x01) Read Coils 02 (0x02) Read Discsreet Inputs 03 (0x03) Read Holding Registers 04 (0x04) Read Input Registers 05 (0x05) Write Single Coil 06 (0x06) Write Single Register 15 (0x0F) Write Multiple Coils 16 (0x10) Write Multiple Registers Please visit http://Modbus.org for more information about the Modbus fieldbus. Use the following table to correlate the external PLC addressing to the controller’s inputs and outputs.

Memory Type Controller I/O Type External PLC Ad- dress Data Type External PLC

Read/ Write

“1” Coil Input 10001 - 20256 Bit Read/ Write

“2” Input Output 20001 - 20256 Bit(s) Read

"3" Holding Register Input 30001 - 30256 Mixed Read/ Write

"4" Input Register Output 40001 - 40256 Mixed Read

“5” Force Single Coil Input 50001 - 50256 Bit Read/ Write

"6" Single Register Input 60001 - 60256 Mixed Read/ Write

“15” Force Multiple Coils Input 0F0001 - 0F0256 Bit(s) Read/ Write

"16" Multiple Register Input 100001 - 100256 Mixed Read/ Write

For Mixed Data Type the type of data depends on the user assigned input and output functions. It is important to understand that the coils and registers use the same memory.

External PLC Alpha Controller

Address # Modbus Input* Assigned Function Length (Bits)

30001:0 0/0 Start 1

30001:1 0/1 Stop 1

30001:2 0/2 Reverse 1

30001:3 0/3 Job Select (Bit) 0 1

30001:4 0/4 Job Select (Bit) 1 1

30001:5 0/5 Job Select (Bit) 2 1

30001:6, 7 0/6 Ignored 2

30001:8 - 15 1/0 Ignored 8

30002 2/0 Part ID (ASCII) 80

# Register:Bit *Byte/Bit

External PLC Alpha Controller

Address # Modbus Output* Assigned Function Length (Bits)

40001:0 0/0 Fault 1

40001:1 0/1 Ready 1

40001:2 0/2 Tool Running 1

40001:3 0/3 In Cycle 1

40001:4 0/4 Cycle OK 1

40001:5 0/5 Cycle NOK 1

40001:6, 7 0/6 Not Used 2

40001:8 -15 1/0 Not Used 8

40002 2/0 Torque (Float) 32

40004 6/0 Angle (Float) 32

# Register:Bit *Byte/Bit

Integer, Float and ASCII data must start on a zero (first) bit of a byte and not in the middle of a byte. Function code 04 (0x04) can only transmit a 16-bit register, not the individual bits within a register. The PLC will need to capture the 16-bit register and then parse the individual bits after receipt.

Each Alpha Controller has an internal software PLC. This PLC serves to enhance the integration of the Alpha controller into an end user’s plant. The PLC emulates the Allen Bradley SLC-504 controller and uses many of the same layouts, addressing structures and commands. Alpha Toolbox has a PLC editor but RSLogix500 can also be used to program ladder logic for the embedded PLC.

The Alpha controller’s PLC has a 4-slot virtual rack layout. There are some differences between a SLC-504 rack and the Alpha rack. The CPU card does not have its own slot, rather it is taken into account since it is embedded and cannot be changed. The discreet 24 VDC I/O uses the same slot rather than separate input or output “cards”. The virtual rack is filled as follows:

The 24V DC I/O Module in slot 0 reflects the physical I/O on the Alpha. The Trailing Fieldbus card in slot #2 uses the M-12 DeviceNet connector on the bottom of the Alpha when the DeviceNet option is ordered. The DB-9 connector is used when Profibus is ordered. The RJ-45 jacks are used when Ethernet/IP or Profinet are ordered.

The ModbusTCP card in slot #1 comes installed as standard equipment on Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha controllers. Each uses the RJ-45 ETHERNET jack on the bottom of the Alpha. The optional DeviceNet Scanner card in slot #3 can be configured to auto-map the devices connected to it. This card uses the M-5

DeviceNet connector on the bottom of the Alpha if this option is ordered.

As ASCII it would be: SOR XIC I:0.0/0 OTE 0.0/0 EOR See section “6.11 Input and Output Connector” on page 126 for PLC addressing of the 24V DC connector.

See Tabel 1 and Table 2 for a listing of supported instructions and file types. NOTE: The Alpha controller supports only one ladder in the program file. Jump commands are not supported so all logic must be performed in one ladder. Table 1: Supported Instructions

Instruction Descriptions Instruction Descriptions Instruction Descriptions

ABS Absolute CTU Count Up NOT Not

ACI String to Integer DIV Divide NXB Next Branch

ACL ASCII Clear Buffer END Program End OR OR

ACN String Concatenate EOR End of Rung OSR One-Shot Rising

ADD Add EQU Equal OTE Output Energize

AEX String Extract GEQ Greater Than or Equal OTL Output Latch

AIC Integer to String GRT Greater Than OUT Output Unlatch

AND And LEQ Less Than or Equal RES Reset

ARD ASCII Read Characters LES Less Than RTO Retentive Timer

ASC String search LIM Limit Test SOR Start of Rung

ASR ASCII String Compare MEQ Masked Comparison for Equal SUB Subtract

AWT ASCII Write MOV Move TOF Timer Off-Delay

BND Branch End MUL Multiply TON Timer On-Delay

BST Branch Start MVM Masked Move XIC Examine if Closed

CLR Clear NEG Negate XIO Examine if Open

CTD Count Down NEQ Not Equal XOR Exclusive OR

Table 2 Supported Files

O0 OUTPUT

I1 INPUT

B3 BINARY

T4 TIMER

C5 COUNTER

R6 CONTROL

N7 INTEGER

ST14 STRING

Instructions Description

ABS Absolute Calculates the absolute value of the source and places the result in the destination.

Instructions Description

ACI String to Integer Use the ACI instruction to convert a numeric ASCII string to an integer value between -32,768 and 32,767.

ACL ASCII Clear Buffer Clears the send and/or the receive buffers.

ACN String Concatenate Combines two strings using ASCII strings as operands. The second string is appended to the first and the result stored in the destination.

ADD Use the ADD instruction to add one value (source A) to another value (source B) and place the result in the destination.

String Extract Use the AEX instruction to create a new string by taking a portion of an existing string and moving it to the new string. Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction. • Source is the existing string. The source value is not affected by this instruction. • Index is the starting position (from 1 to 82) of the string to extract (an index of 1 indi- cates the left-most character of the string). • Number is the number of characters (from 1 to 82) to extract (startis at the indexed position). If the index plus the number is greater than the total characters in the source string, the destination string will be the characters from the index to the end of the source string. • Destination is the string function (ST14:X) where the extracted string is stored.

AIC Integer to String Converts an integer value, between -32,768 and 32,767, to an ASCII string.

AND Performs a bit-by-bit logical AND. The operation is performed using the value at source A and the value at source B. The result is stored in the destination.

ASCII read characters Performs a read from a source channel and moves the value into a destination string. Provides a Result integer for the status of the read. Channel 0 = Serial port Channel 2 = Ethernet port The internal PLC supports reading from and writing to the Network Ethernet port on the con- trollers. Here are the rules: If Channel ID is set to 2 then the virtual port 8786 will be used. If a Channel ID >1024 is used then that number is the virtual port used. Only one virtual port can be used and the first rung in the logic with an ARD or ARW command with a Channel ID >1024 determines which virtual port will be used. The Channel ID cannot be set to an address, it must be an integer.

Instructions Description

String Search Use the ASC instruction to search an existing string for an occurrence of the source string. Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction: • Source is the string you want to find when examining the search string. • Index is the starting position (from 1 to 82) of the source string. (An index of 1 indi- cates the left-most character of the string.) • Search is the string you want to examine. • Result is an integer where the processor stores the position of the search string where the source string begins. If no match is found, result is set equal to zero.

ASCII String Compare Use the ASR instruction to compare two ASCII strings. The system looks for a match in length and upper/lower case characters. If two strings are identical, the rung is true; if there are any differences, the rung is false.

ASCII Write Writes a source string to the designated channel. Provides a Result integer for the status of the write. Channel 0 = Serial port Channel 1 = Display Channel 2 = Ethernet The internal PLC supports reading from and writing to the Network Ethernet port on the con- trollers. Here are the rules: If Channel ID is set to 2 then the virtual port 8786 will be used. If a Channel ID >1024 is used then that number is the virtual port used. Only one virtual port can be used and the first rung in the logic with an ARD or ARW command with a Channel ID >1024 determines which virtual port will be used. The Channel ID cannot be set to an address, it must be an integer.

BND Branch End Marks the end of a branch.

BST Branch Start Marks the beginning of a new branch on a rung.

CLR Clear Sets the value of a destination word to zero.

Instructions Description

Count Down Counts false-to-true transitions. When rung conditions for a CTD instruction have made a false-to-true transition, the accumu- lated value is decremented by one count, provided that the rung containing the CTD instruction is evaluated between these transitions. The accumulated counts are retained when the rung conditions again becomes false. The accu- mulated count is retained until cleared by a reset (RES) instruction that has the same address as the counter reset.

A RES instruction having the same address as the CTD instruction is executed OR the count is increment- ed greater than or equal to +32,767 with a CTU instruction Done Bit DN (Bit 13) Accumulated value is equal to or greater than the preset value The accumulated value becomes less than the preset value Count Down Enable Bit CU (Bit 14) rung conditions are true Rung conditions go false or a RES instruction having the same address as the CTD instruction is enabled

Count Down Underflow Bit OV (Bit 11)

Accumulated value wraps around to +32,768 from -32,767

Count Up Counts false-to-true rung transitions. When rung conditions for a CTU instruction have made a false-to-true transition, the accumu- lated value is incremented by one count, provided that the rung containing the CTU instruction is evaluated between these transitions. The accumulated value is retained when the rung conditions again become false. The accumu- lated count is retained until cleared by a reset (RES) instruction that has the same address as the counter reset. The count value must remain in the range of -32768 to 32767. If the count value goes above 32767 the overflow (OV) bit is set. If the count value goes below -32768, the counter status underflow (UN) bit is set. A counter can be reset to zero using the reset (RES) instruction.

A RES instruction having the same address as the CTU instruction is executed OR the count is dec- remented less than or equal to +32,767 with a CTD instruction Done Bit DN (Bit 13) Accumulated value is equal to or greater than the preset value The accumulated value becomes less than the preset value

Count Up Over- flow Bit OV (Bit 12)

Accumulated value wraps around to -32,768 from +32,767

Count Up Enable Bit CU (Bit 15) Rung conditions are true Rung conditions go false or a RES instruction having the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled

Instructions Description

Divide Use the DIV instruction to divide one value (source A) by another (source B). The rounded quo- tient is then placed in the destination. If the remainder is 0.5 or greater, round up occurs in the destination. The unrounded quotient is stored in the most significant word of the math register. The remainder is placed in the least significant word of the math register.

END Program End Marks the end of the program.

EOR End of Rung Marks the end of a rung.

Equal Use the EQU instruction to test whether two values are equal. If source A and source B are equal, the instruction is logically true. If these values are not equal, the instruction is logically false.

Greater than or Equal Use the GEQ instruction to test whether one value (source A) is greater than or equal to another (source B). If the value at source A is greater than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is less than the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Greater Than Use the GRT instruction to test whether one value (source A) is greater than another (source B). If the value at source A is greater than the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is less than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Less Than or Equal Use the LEQ instruction to test whether one value (source A) is less than or equal to another (source B). If the value at source A is less than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is greater than the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Less Than Use the LES instruction to test whether one value (source A) is less than another (source B). If source A is less than the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is greater than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Limit Test Use the LIM instruction to test for values within or outside a specified range, depending on how limits are set. If the Low Limit has a value equal to or less than the High Limit, the instruction is true when the Test value is between the limits or is equal to either limit. If the Test value is outside the limits, the instruction is false.

Instructions Description

Masked Comparison for Equal Use the MEQ instruction to compare data at a source address with data at a compare address. Use of this instruction allows portions of the data to be masked by a separate word. The source is the address of the value to compare. The mask is the address of the mask through which the instruction moves data. The mask can also be a hexadecimal value (constant). The compare is an integer value or the address of the reference. If the 16 bits of data at the source address are equal to the 16 bits of data at the compare address (less masked bits), the instruction is true.

Message Use MSG to send an instruction directly to the CPU. Can be used to send messages to trailing Alpha controllers. Proper syntax is required. Text editor syntax: MSG # XXXXH HW LW: where # is spindle number, XXXXH is the command, HW is High Word and LW is Low Word. High Words and Low Words contain information provid- ed by the instruction. The user must be trained by a STANLEY trainer to use this instruction.

Monitor Use MON to monitor for a CPU event and use as a trigger. Can be used to send messages to trailing Alpha controllers. Proper syntax is required. Text editor syntax: MSG # XXXXH HW LW: where # is spindle number, XXXXH is the command, HW is High Word and LW is Low Word. High Words and Low Words contain information provid- ed by the instruction. The user must be trained by a STANLEY trainer to use this instruction.

MOV Move This output instruction moves the source value to the destination location. As long as the rung remains true, the instruction moves the data each scan.

MUL Multiply Use the MUL instruction to multiply one value (source A) by another (source B) and place the result in the destination.

Masked Move The MVM instruction is a word instruction that moves data from a source location to a destina- tion, and allows portions of the destination data to be masked by a separate word. As long as the rung remains true, the instruction moves the data each scan.

NEG Negate Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of the source and then place it in the destination. The destination contains the two’s complement of the source.

Not Equal Use the NEQ instruction to test whether two values are not equal. If source A and source B are not equal, the instruction is logically true. If the two values are equal, the instruction is logically false.

NOT This instruction performs a bit-by-bit logical NOT. The operation is performed using the value at source A. The result (one’s complement of A) is stored in the destination.

Instructions Description

NXB Next Branch Marks the beginning of another branch.

Instructions Description

OR This instruction performs a bit-by-bit logical OR. The operation is performed using the value at source A and the value at source B. The result is stored in the destination.

One Shot Rising The OSR instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time. Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on the change of state of the rung from false-to-true. When the rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction go from false-to-true, the OSR instruc- tion will be true for one scan. After one scan is complete, the OSR instruction becomes false, even if the rung conditions preceding it remain true. The OSR instruction will only become true again if the rung conditions preceding it transition from false-to-true. The address assigned to the OSR instruction is not the one-shot address referenced by the program, nor does it indicate the state of the OSR instruction. This address allows the OSR instruction to remember its previous rung state.

OTE Output Energize Use the OTE instruction in the ladder program to turn on a bit when rung conditions are evalu- ated as true.

Output Latch OTL is a retentive output instruction. OTL can only turn on a bit (while OTU can only turn off a bit). This instruction is usually used in pair with the OTU instruction. The program can examine a bit controlled by OTL instructions as often as necessary. When rung conditions become false (after being true), the bit remains set and the correspond- ing output remains energized. When enabled, the latch instruction tells the controller to turn on the addressed bit. Thereafter, the bit remains on, regardless of the rung condition, until the bit is turned off (typically by an OTU instruction in another rung).

Output Unlatch OTU is a retentive output instruction. OTU can only turn off a bit (while OTL can only turn on a bit). This instruction is usually used in pairs with the OTL instruction. The program can examine a bit controlled by the OTU instruction as often as necessary. The unlatch instruction tells the controller to turn off the addressed bit. Thereafter, the bit re- mains off, regardless of the rung condition, until it is turned on (typically by an OTL instruction in another rung).

Reset Use a RES instruction to reset a timer or counter. When the RES instruction is enabled, it resets the Timer On Delay (TON), Retentive Timer (RTO), Count Up (CTU) or Count Down (CTD) instruc- tion having the same address as the RES instruction.

Instructions Description

Retentive Timer Use the RTO instruction to turn an output on or off after its timer has been on for a preset time interval. The RTO instruction is a retentive instruction that begins to count millisecond intervals when rung conditions become true. The RTO instruction retains its accumulated value when the rung conditions become false. The Time Base must be 10 msec. The timer will not work in any other Time Base.

rung conditions are true and the accumulated value is less than the preset value

Rung conditions go false or when the done bit is set

Timer Timing Bit TT (Bit 14)

Timer Enable Bit EN (Bit 15) rung conditions are true rung conditions go false or if the timer is reset with the RES instruction

SOR Start of Rung Marks the beginning of a new rung.

SUB Subtract Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value (source B) from another (source A) and place the result in the destination.

Timer Off Delay Use the TOF instruction to turn an output on or off after its rung has been off for a preset time interval. The TOF instruction begins to count millisecond intervals when the rung makes a true- to-false transition. As long as rung conditions remain false, the timer increments its accumulat- ed value (ACC) each millisecond until it reaches the preset value (PRE). The accumulated value is reset when rung conditions go true regardless of whether the timer has timed out. The Time Base must be 10 msec. The timer will not work in any other Time Base.

rung conditions go false and the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value rung conditions are true

Timer Done Bit DN (Bit 13)

rung conditions are false and the accumulated value is less than the preset value

rung conditions go true or when the done bit is set

Timer Timing Bit TT (Bit 14)

Timer Enable Bit EN (Bit 15) rung conditions are false rung conditions go true

Instructions Description

Timer On Delay Use the TON instruction to turn an output on or off after the timer has been on for a preset time interval. The TON instruction begins to count millisecond intervals when rung conditions become true. As long as rung conditions remain true, the timer adjusts its accumulated value (ACC) each evaluation until it reaches the preset value (PRE). The accumulated value is reset when rung conditions go false, regardless of whether the timer has timed out. The Time Base must be 10 msec. The timer will not work in any other Time Base.

rung conditions are true and the accumulated value is less than the preset value

rung conditions go false or when the done bit is set

Timer Timing Bit TT (bit 14)

Timer Enable Bit EN (bit 15) rung conditions are true rung conditions go false

Examine If Closed Use the XIC instruction in the ladder program to determine if a bit is on. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is on (1), then the instruction is evaluated as true. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is off (0), then the instruction is evaluated as false.

Examine If Open Use the XIO instruction in the ladder program to determine if a bit is off. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is off (0), then the instruction is evaluated as true. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is on (1), then the instruction is evaluated as false.

XOR Exclusive Or Performs a bit-by-bit logical Exclusive Or. The operation is performed using the value at source A and the value at source B. The result is stored in the destination.

Use the PLC editor provided in Alpha Toolbox to create and edit ladder logic files. See section “4.1 Connection” on page 98 on how to connect to Alpha Toolbox with a computer. To get to the PLC Editor in Alpha Toolbox navigate to the Setup/Other/PLC page and click on the Edit button.

The Add Branch button adds a branch to the rung or around an instruction. The List of Instruction buttons add the instruction to the ladder logic. Use the mouse to click, hold and drag the instruction to the desired spot on the ladder. When an instruction starts moving Add Points appear to show all the available places to add the instruction on the ladder. Or click on a branch or other instruction in the ladder and then click an instruction button in the list of instructions to add to the ladder. Undo removes the last item or action and reverting to a previous state. Revert back to any previous state since the last save by clicking Undo multiple times.

Redo revert the effects of the undo action. Multiple Redo’s are allowed through all stored Undo states. Add Initialization Files button will insert predefined strings and integers that are initialized when the PLC starts.

Integers are stored in N7:X files and must be a Decimal number in the range from 32767 to -32768. Strings are stored in ST14:X files and their values must be ASCII characters. Maximum string length is 80 characters plus a carriage return and line feed (CRLF). When string files are written they are displayed in capital letters, but if they were writen in lower case they will be stored in lower case. The Add Rung button adds another rung to the bottom of the ladder. Zoom In and Out allows the user to adjust the size of the view. To move a rung, select the rung by clicking it with the mouse and clicking on one of the green move icons. The rungs may be moved up or down in single steps using the single arrow icons or to the top or bottom using the multiple arrow icons. The red circle with the X delete icon is available for all items on the rung. Select the item to be deleted by clicking it with the mouse and then click the delete icon. The Add Description icon is available for all items on the ladder. Select the item by clicking it with the mouse and then click the Add Description icon. Type in a description and click the green check icon to save it or the red X icon to discard it.

While editing the ladder the Save or Cancel dialog box appears. Press the Apply button to save the changes. Press the Cancel button to discard the changes. When adding Initialization Files the window must first be saved by clicking Apply and then the ladder logic must be saved by clicking Apply again.

Clicking a field will select the box and open its value edit window along with showing the Delete and Add Description icons.

Type the required values for the field and press the Enter key on the computer’s keyboard. This saves the field value in the box. Click on Apply in the Save or Cancel dialog window to save the ladder logic.

Continue adding/ editing rungs/ instructions to complete the ladder logic.

After creating/editing a ladder logic program using RSLogix500, the information must then be converted to a format recognized by the Alpha. First highlight all the rungs from top to bottom, then select Copy from the Edit menu.

Paste the information into a text editor. RSLogix500 adds characters to certain addresses which are carried over to the paste operation. The Alpha controller does not support these added characters. They must be removed or converted to the appropriate address before saving the file for use in the Alpha. See section “3.1.1.1 Wizard Screens” on page 39.

This must now be converted to a JSON file. Type the following BEFORE the first SOR in the pasted logic in the text editor: { CRLF TAB “plc”: TAB { CRLF TAB TAB “1”: TAB { CRLF TAB TAB TAB “700”: TAB “ Then type the following AFTER the last EOR in the pasted logic in the text editor: “, CRLF TAB TAB } CRLF TAB } CRLF }

Save the file using the .json extension and choose “All Files” under Save as type in the Save window.

Once the file is saved it can be put into the Alpha controller. See section “3.1.4.11 PLC Tab” on page 83.

To provide a version, put another JSON parameter tag after the logic or name tag and before the ending brackets. The new tag is”702”: “VERSION”. There is a 15 character limit to this parameter.

Expert and Specialist Alpha controllers can be managers (leaders) to twenty-three other Advanced or Node Alpha controllers or QPM Cordless tools (if the Expert or Specialist is a wireless version). An Ethernet cable connection between them creates a multiple spindle system. The lead Alpha controller manage all I/O connections and ladder logic for the multiple spindle system.

Advanced Alpha controllers can be managers (leaders) to one other Advanced or Node Alpha controller. The lead Alpha controller manage all I/O connections and ladder logic for the multiple spindle system.

The lead and trailing controllers are connected via a standard Ethernet cable to their Ethernet ports, or via IEEE 802.11b/g/n for a QPM Cordless Tool. They must follow all the same addressing requirements on this Spindle Network that a standard Ethernet network requires. For QPM Cordess Tools follow the pairing instructions in the QPM Cordless Tool manual otherwise to connect an Advanced and Node controllers to the lead controller connect the Ethernet cable as follows:

Expert and Specialist Alpha controllers, when used as a lead controller, do not require any setting to be changed to recognize a trailing spindle. Using the keypad or Alpha Toolbox on the trailing controller set the Obtain IP Address From Network parameter to YES, this is set to YES by default. Exit and save the setting. Next connect the lead controller to the trailing controller, at that point the lead Expert or Specialist will then provide the IP Addresses to the trailing controller.

Advanced controllers, when used as a lead spindle require manual pairing of the lead and trailing spindle, connect the Ethernet cable as shown.

Using the keypad, or Alpha Toolbox, on the leading (Advanced) and trailing (Advanced or Node) controller set the Obtain IP Address From Network parameter to NO. Then enter an IP Address and Subnet Mask values for both controllers. Remember to keep the IP Addresses similar but not exactly the same while keeping the Subnet Mask values the same. Type the IP Address of the lead controller into the LEAD IP ADDRESS parameter of the trailing controller. Exit and save the setting.

Once the trailing controller connects to the lead controller the user must acknowledge the addition. The lead controller will display the Add New Spindle dialog box. Select the spindle number for the added controller. Before acknowledgement the trailing controller trying to connect will: • flash the red, green and yellow status lights on the controller and the tool • flash the QPM light on the face of the controller and • display the Identify Spindle message window.

Press the Yes interactive menu button to accept the new spindle connection. Press the No interactive menu button to decline the new spindle connection. After connection the lead spindle will add the new spindle as a tab on the run screen. It will also add and select the ALL tab to show both spindles’ run screen on the lead controller.

See section “2.7 Display” on page 27 for a description of the elements on the run screen. Each spindle must be programmed individually. The ony way to copy programming from one spindle to another is to Export a Jobs file from one controller and Import it to another. To program the spindles from the keypad press the right or left arrow keys to select the desired spindle tab and program as normal. See section “3 Programming” on page 38. The All tab provides the SETUP interactive menu button. The User, Regional and Clock settings for all controllers move here. These settings are global for all controllers in the multiple spindle systems. On connection, or when they are changed, the lead controller’s users and passwords will overwrite the trailing controllers’ users and passwords to match. When the trailing spindle is disconnected it will retain the lead spindle’s users and passwords. Alpha Toolbox will also display all spindles on its Home screen.

See Section “4.3 Editing Parameters” on page 100 to edit the parameter via Alpha Toolbox. Once a specific controller is connected the lead controller will remember it. If the trailing spindle gets disconnected then reconnected there is no need to acknowledge the connection again. However, if a trailing controller is removed (forgotten) and a different controller is attached the different controller must then be acknowledged before it is added to the system. If a trailing controller is offline or disconnected the spindle’s tab on the lead controller’s display will turn red. The lost spindle’s display on Alpha Toolbox will turn red as well. When the spindle comes back online the red will turn to the normal color.

Use the right arrow to select the tab with the disconnected spindle. The color change to red and shows a ”Spindle Communication” Fault to make it obvious that the trailing spindle is not connected.

The lead controller’s QPM logo will blink if it had a trailing controller connected and the trailing controller goes offline or is disconnected. The trailing controller’s QPM logo will blink if it has a value in the Master IP Address parameter and is not connected to a controller with the specified IP Address.

Forget the trailing spindle to stop the logo from blinking on the lead controller. Delete any values in the Master IP Address in the trailing controller to stop the logo from blinking. See section “8.2 Disconnect” on page 177.

When the multiple spindle mode is no longer required remove the Ethernet cable between the two controllers. On the lead spindle navigate to the trailing spindle tab by pressing the right arrow while on the run screen. The disconnected spindle run screen is red. Press the FORGET interactive menu button to delete the trailing spindle connection. The Spindle Delete message appears. Press the Yes interactive menu button to delete the spindle.

The spindle deletes and the run screen will return to a normal single spindle run screen if that was the only trialing spindle. On the trailing spindle delete the values in the Master IP Address parameter, EXIT and save.

Many fastening situations require that two or more fasteners are secured simultaneously which even out the distributed clamp loads on each of the fasteners in the assembly. In a tool control controller such as the Alpha, this is known as synchronization. Expert, Specialist, Advanced, and Node Alpha controllers can synchronize its tool operation with other Alpha controllers over the spindle network so that they start each step of a multi-step strategy at the same time. QPM Cordless B-Series tools cannot be synchronized with other tools. The tools are synchronized so all spindles complete a given step before continuing on with the subsequent step(s).

When multiple Alpha controllers are synchronized, the tool strategy parameters are the same for each. This allows each fastener in the assembly to be driven to the final target in the same manner at a controlled pace. For each step to be synchronized the Delay Between Steps parameter must be greater than zero for each controller.

To synchronize the Alpha controllers simply assign a START input on the lead controller and configure the Spindle number as ALL.

• Never connect the SPINDLE port to a plant network.

The lead controller in a multiple spindle system can communicate to a plant network via the embedded protocols, see section “3.1.3 COMMUNICATIONS Menu” on page 60. The lead controller will collect and transmit the

fastening cycle data after each fastening cycle from each controller in the system via the selected protocol.

Connecting the multiple spindle lead Expert, Specialist, or Advanced controller to a facility network using the ETHERNET port. Use customer’s supplied values and enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway into the lead controller.

If required setup parameters for embedded protocols under Setup>Communications.

Data for each fastening cycle is entered as a line in the fastening cycle record in each controller in the system for its own spindle. However, when a system is ran in Synchornized mode the fastening cycle records get an additional column labled Mult ID. This Multi ID is the same in each spindle in the muti-tool system for the same fastening cycle ran. This allows the user to correlate the same run in each file.Operation The fixtured tools must be started with a remote start switch connected to the START input of the lead Alpha. The lead controller will apply a start to the synchronized trailing spindles in the system. When the remote start switch is depressed all tools will start. All tools will run the first step in the selected Job/ Task. Once each tool has completed the first step it will stop and wait for all tools to finish the step. If all tools finished the step OK then all tools start the next step in the multi-step strategy. This process continues until all steps are complete or any tool times out or is stopped or aborted. All multi-step rules still apply in that the tool must meet the programmed OK window to move on to the next step. If a tool fails a step it will stop which causes all other tools to stop immediately. Once they stop the In-Cycle indicator on the run screen will go away and a SYNC shutoff code is indicated for all controllers except the one that failed to complete a step OK. All tools will be stopped immediately if any single tool is stopped due to an abort event.

When in synchronization mode any Reverse, Job Select, Task Select or PartID input from any of the synchronized spindles will cause all spindles to react to the input. All spindles are required to maintain the same number of accumulated bolt count. If one spindle has a bolt count different from the other the controllers will not run from the START:ALL input. Individual spindles must be ran in recovery operations to get all spindles on the same bolt count to continue or reset the Job to recover.

There are no user serviceable components within the QB Alpha controller. That does not mean that there are no maintenance requirements or actions to be taken to insure optimal performance of the controller.

Store idle tools and controllers in a dry secure area. For maximum tool life, only use lubricants specified in the service instructions. Keep maintenance and repair records on all tools and controllers. Frequency of repair and nature of the repairs can reveal unsafe applications.

The modules require routine maintenance to insure optimal performance. On a monthly basis: • Visually inspect and tighten external connections. • Visually inspect all external cables for excessive wear, frayed wire, or breaks. Replace as needed.

Use the following diagnostics and troubleshooting guide to identify, isolate, and diagnose both mechanical and controller software related problems.

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Physical inspection: worn, frayed, or broken connections or wires

Tool cable Replace

Replace tool cable

Tool Replace/Repair Swap with known, good operating tool Replace/Repair tool

Verify and or adjust tool calibration factor(s) to match calibration factor(s) for tool. May require tool recertification.

Calibration Factors Verify/Adjust Zero or Span Fault

No bolt count on the Run screen for the selected Job/ Task

Create new strategy

Cycle Abort set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Cycle Abort

Torque Target set to zero (0) on torque control strategy

Set higher amount on Torque Target

Tool does not run

Strategy Verify/Adjust

Angle Target set to zero (0) on angle control strategy

Set higher amount on Angle Target

Tool Speed set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Tool Speed

Power set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Power

Acceleration set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Acceleration

See Fault Guide (Section “1.6.2 Electric Service Ratings” on page 20)

Fault Various errors Fault displayed on screen

See Message Guide (Section “1.5 Safety” on page 15)

Press and hold trigger and view message on display

STOP condition or input Remove STOP condition

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Physical inspection: incorrect wiring, termination, connections, devices or programming of I/O assignments

Repair/replace/ reprogram external input and output connections and wiring as necessary based on I/O drawings

External input connections Repair/replace/ reprogram

Tool does not run remotely

Lost + 24 V DC Power Supply Return for repair No or low voltage (<11V) between Pins A and V Return for repair

Power off Turn Alpha on

Power on Plug unit in

No power Restore power

Plugged in Check power at source

No lights, no display

AMP board Failure Return for repair Unit is on, plugged in, and there is power at the source Return for repair

Set Torque Audit Step and or Angle Audit Step on the actual desired audit step

Torque Audit Step and or Angle Audit Step set on undefined step

Completed Rundown - Zero for Torque and Angle Readings

Incorrect Audit Step Verify/Adjust

Set Threshold Torque to zero (0) or a value lower than final torque

Completed Rundown - No Torque and Angle Readings

Tool ran strategy but no fastening cycle values appear on display

Threshold Torque set too high Verify/Adjust

Low-torque reject. Snug Torque has been set to zero (0)

Incomplete rundown (AC/TM) Long bolt Verify/Adjust

Set higher amount on Snug Torque

Incomplete rundown (TC/AM) Prevailing Torque Verify/Adjust Parts changed. Low angle reject. Parts not snug

Insert a Self Tap step prior to audit step

Consistent high angle reject (TC/ AM) Long bolt Verify/Adjust Snug Torque has been left at default value

Set higher amount on Snug Torque

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Torque Target is close to High Torque

Increase High Torque

Consistent high torque reject (TC/ AM) Hard joint Verify/Adjust

Add a within step downshift or turn on ATC or ATC+ to the audit step

No downshift

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, repair it by replacing the motor or gearing or head.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

Overcurrent Fault!

Increase speed of tool, increase downshift speed, or remove downshift altogether. Create a Pre-torque step with a Delay Between Steps of at least 0.05 seconds. Change input voltage to 230 V AC

A larger tool is used with a long rundown or Downshift Speed set very low. Fluctuating incoming AC voltage as seen on the ANALYZE screen.

Fault condition resets when DC bus voltage is within limits.

Low DC bus voltage

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, repair it by replacing the motor.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

GFI Fault!

Use an ohmmeter or the motor tester to check: Phase-to-phase values; they should be equal. Phase-to-ground; they should be >2 Megohms.

Defective Tool Replace defective tool

Replace defective tool

Use a voltmeter to test for proper voltage WHILE the tool is running. Check for proper grounding at the receptacle.

Insufficient AC input power Repair incoming power system

Repair incoming power system

Logic Voltage Fault!

Defective triple power supply or logic board inside controller

Return controller for repair Logic Voltage Fault! appears on display Return for repair

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Exchanging known good tool can verify the tool is the cause of failure

Replace defective tool

Replace defective tool

Defective tool

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Position Feedback Fault!

Whip was removed from extension cable and connected directly to the controller, which then cleared the error

Reduce total cable length to < 60 meters

Fault condition resets when cable length is reduced.

Tool cable longer than 60 meters

Torque Cal. set to a non-standard value (i.e. greater than 20% variance from Nominal Cal. )

Read the Nominal Torque Cal. value from the tool and compare it to the specific Torque Cal.

Set Torque Cal. to the specific torque calibration value for the tool

May require tool recertification

Transducer Span Fault!

Wrong values indicated under SERVICE>TOOL screen

Wrong tool parameters in tool memory board

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Defective tool Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Torque Cal. set to a non-standard value (i.e. greater than 20% variance from Nominal Cal. )

Read the Nominal Torque Cal. value from the tool and compare it to the specific Torque Cal.

Set Torque Cal. to the specific torque calibration value for the tool

May require tool recertification

Remove the object wrapped around gear case. Open gear case and inspect for wrong components or components are in backward

Remove the object wrapped around gear case. Reassemble gear case with proper components.

Transducer Zero Fault!

ANALYZE screen shows a zero offset on the transducer health meter

Tool gear case binding

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Defective tool Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Modify Temperature parameter value. The maximum for handheld tools is 85˚C . The maximum for fixtured tools is 125 ˚ C.

Viewed Temperature value under SETUP-> OTHER-> TOOL tab and compared with Temperature value on ANALYZE screen

Wrong value in Temperature parameter

Modify Temperature parameter value

This error automatically resets when temperature drops and stays below trip point for 8 minutes on QPM tools. It can also be reset by cycling power, however, if the tool has not cooled down this error will reappear in 8 minutes. For fixtured tools turn off Soft Stop .

Tool is hot to touch and shuts down: QPM tools shutdown when tool internal temperature reaches and stays above programmed set point for 8 minutes

Excessive duty cycle Use a larger tool for the job

Temperature Fault!

To prevent an over temperature, modify the strategy by raising downshift speed or eliminating the downshift; Also try a multi-step strategy with a Delay Between Steps of at least 0.5 seconds. For fixtured tools turn off Soft Stop .

Tool is hot to touch and shuts down: QPM tools shutdown when tool internal temperature reaches and stays above programmed set point for 8 minutes

Contact STANLEY Assembly Technologies for help on modifying strategy

Inefficient Rundown Strategy

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Tool has operated without overheating for a significant period of time but suddenly overheats; operator notices change of tool operation (i.e., noise, vibration, and speed are different than normal)

Perform maintenance on tool; open and inspect tool head and gearing; replace any worn or broken parts

Open and inspect tool head and gearing; replace any worn or broken parts

Output / gearing failure

Temperature Fault! Continued

The type of joint (hard or soft) can cause (see Excessive Duty Cycle cause above); switch from 115 V AC to 230 V AC or correct reduced incoming voltage problem

When tested with a voltmeter, or as observed on the ANALYZE screen, incoming voltage is <90% of nominal

Switch from 115 V AC to 230 V AC or correct reduced incoming voltage problem

Reduced incoming voltage

Wrong values indicated under SERVICE-> TOOL screen

Unrecognized Tool! Wrong tool parameters in tool memory board

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, see the next row for troubleshooting and repair.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

Tool Communications!

Replace and reprogram the Tool Memory Board in the handle of the tool

Tool Memory Board failure Replace the Tool Memory Board Tool found to be defective

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Defective tool Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Check tool whip/ extension cable connections and ensure they are tight

No values indicated under SERVICE>TOOL screen

Tool not electrically connected to controller

Connect tool to controller

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, see the next row for troubleshooting and repair.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

Open tool handle and check transducer cable connections to ensure tightness and the wiring is not damaged. Remove motor housing sleeve and check blue transducer wire for damage. Remove the gear pack from the motor on the tool and replace the torque transducer; testing with a known good transducer connected to the tool before replacement helps determine which parts are faulty.

Transducer Current Fault!

View transducer health, current and torque output meters on ANALYZE screen and determine if values are in normal range. Tool found to be defective

Transducer / transducer cable within tool failure

Replace transducer / transducer cable in tool

Change tool to a type the controller can run. Look under SERVICE-> Controller for list of supported tools.

The wrong tool type has been connected to the controller.

Change tool to a type the controller can run.

Unsupported Tool! fault on display

Unsupported Tool!

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Reboot controller; keep controller off for at least 20 seconds

Reboot controller; keep controller off for at least 20 seconds

Controller Firmware has just been updated

Servo Connection Fault!

Servo Connection Fault! on display

Spindle Communications on display

Lead or trailing controller is off Turn lead or trailing controller on

Turn lead or trailing controller on

Controller is setup as a lead or trailing controller

Default the controller Controller is a single spindle Default the controller

Spindle Communications

Reconnect Ethernet cable between Lead and trailing controllers. If using external switches ensure they are energized.

Visual/Mechanical inspection to ensure cable connections are tight

Reconnect Ethernet cable between Lead and trailing controllers

Ethernet cable disconnected

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Cable has disconnected from controller or PI box Reconnect cable Visual inspection Reconnect cable

Communication Fault

Actual bolt count on display is less than required

Count Fault Operator backed out a fastener Re-fasten loosened fastener

Re-fasten loosened fastener

Operator performed a double hit or fastened more fasteners than was expected

Reset Job or loosen a secured fastener to return to the proper bolt count

Actual bolt count on display is more than required

Reset Job or loosen a fastened fastener

Program Fault

Download a new file and try to load it again

Tool Update Failed error message appears.

Download a new file and try to load it again

Tool INI file is corrupt

See Tool Communications! in section “9.2.1 Fault Guide” on page 184

See Tool Communications! in section “9.2.1 Fault Guide” on page 184

Tool Update Failed

Loss of communication between tool and controller

Tool Communications! fault on display

PLC Message The PLC is providing the message None PLC Message is displayed on controller Press OK

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Press OK. Delete the PLC file. Read the entire file and fix the syntax issue.

Invalid PLC File Bad command or syntax used in the PLC.json file

Read the entire file and fix the syntax issue

Invalid PLC File appears on display

Red, Greed, Yellow Status lights are blinking in sequence on trailing controller and tool with ‘Add Spindle’ dialog box on display of lead controller

Press OK. Choose a number and add the spindle

Trailing spindle is wanting to connect to lead controller

Choose a number and add the spindle

Identifying Spindle

Operator pressed the Identify button under ANALYZE Press OK Display on lead controller is on ANALYZE screen Press OK

Program the selected Task or select another Task that is already programmed

An unprogrammed Task has been selected

Select a different Task

A non-valid Job/ Task has been selected

Select a different Job/Task from 1 to 99

Select a different Job/Task

Tool Disabled

Have a valid part enter the station. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the controller.

Network needs to know that a valid unprocessed part has entered the station

Have a valid part enter the station

Select a new Job/ Task. Reset the Job.

Select a new Job/ Task. Reset the Job.

Accumulated bolt count is equal to Job/Task bolt count

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Remove the active input. Reassign input.

Remove the active input. Reassign input.

A input is applied that is assigned as STOP

Select a different Job/Task. Select a different socket for verification.

Select a different Job/Task. Select a different socket for verification.

Job/ Task Verify inputs not matching selected Job/ Task.

Wait until the controller has finished the boot up process

Wait until the controller has finished the boot up process

The controller is in the process of booting

Tool Disabled Continued

Wait for the timer to reset. Change the Cycle Lock-out timer value.

Wait for the timer to reset. Change the Cycle Lock-out timer value.

The Cycle Lock-out timer is active

Reject Count Exceeded Reset the Job

Reset the Job

Retrain operator on proper process to insure the internal PLC logic is met. Delete the PLC program.

Retrain operator on proper process to insure the internal PLC logic is met

Logic criteria not met for tool operation

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Press the MFB to arm the tool. Change the tool’s parameter to not require arming.

Tool is not armed Press the MFB to arm the tool

Tool Disabled Continued

Press the MFB to acknowledge and reset the NOK fastening cycle. Change the MFB parameter to not require Reset Reject.

Press the MFB to acknowledge and reset the NOK fastening cycle

A Reset Reject is active

Users may order installation and repair parts directly from STANLEY, or their agents.

Label, Warning, Pinch Point X5557

Label, Warning, Reaction Point X5571

Label, Warning, Tubenut X5556

Supplementary documentation to better understand the STANLEY QB Alpha Controllers, QPM EB, EA, EC, E-

Series corded tools, and QPM B-Series cordless tools.

For all STANLEY electric assembly tools, the angle information is based on the rotation of the resolver, which is directly attached to the rotor. This information is used for motor commutation, and it also serves as an angle encoder. The rotation of the tool output can be determined by dividing the rotor angle by the total gear ratio for the tool. All things can deflect when loaded. Just as a long steel bar attached to a socket to produce high torque will deflect, likewise the gears within an assembly tool will deflect when subjected to the torque loads. In effect, the gears act as a torsion spring between the rotor and the socket, and it is the deflection of this spring that can give false angle data. In addition to the angular deflection within the gears of the tool, there can also be deflection of the parts of the joint. Whenever this deflection is present in the tool or the joint or the tool mounting device, the angle information derived from the resolver will indicate a larger angle than the tool output actually rotates. This error is directly proportional to the torque level. That is, the deflection at 40 NM will be twice that at 20 NM. In a torque vs. angle curve of a fastening cycle, at the end when the torque reaches its maximum value, the angle will also be at its maximum value. After shut off, as the torque falls to zero, the angle should remain at its maximum value. But in the typical torque vs. angle curve, as the torque falls to zero, the angle also appears to fall some amount. This is not because the fastener is being loosened. It is actually the resolver indicating that the angular deflection of the gears is relaxing to the neutral position. In this case, the maximum angle indicated at the maximum torque was incorrect. The resolver indicated more angle than the tool output actually rotated. To correct for this slight error in angle data, the Alpha controller has a STANLEY-exclusive solution. The Torsion Factor allows the user to input a value that compensates for the torsional spring rate of any part of the fastening system (the gears of the tool, the joint components, or the tool mounting device), and this factor is used to correct the angle reading throughout the fastening cycle. This factor is entered as Degrees per NM, and its default value is zero. If the default value is used, there will be no angular correction. If a value of 0.1 is used, each angle data point (every millisecond) will be modified by subtracting 0.1 times the torque value. For example, at 15 NM, the controller will subtract 1.5 degrees from the angle reading for that sample. At 30 NM, the controller will subtract three degrees for that sample. The easiest way to determine the correct value for the Torsion Factor is to look at a torque vs. angle trace with Torsion Factor set to zero. The amount of degrees that the socket appears to loosen after the maximum torque, divided by that maximum torque is the Torsion Factor. For example, consider a torque vs. angle trace that indicates a maximum torque of 40 NM, and the maximum angle at this torque of 50 degrees. But the angle appears to loosen by four degrees as the torque drops to zero. The Torsion Factor can be determined by dividing four degrees by 40 NM to arrive at a Torsion Factor of 0.1 degrees per NM. When this value is entered into the Torsion Factor parameter, each angle reading will be corrected by this factor. When this factor is set correctly, any torque vs. angle trace will now indicate no apparent loosening of the fastener as the torque drops to zero after shut off; which is exactly as it should be.

Now that the angle can be indicated with great precision, the other challenge is to validate these results against an external torque/angle transducer with monitor. This is not as simple as setting both the controller and the monitor to the same snug torque and comparing the resulting angle. It has been found that a tool’s torque trace will never track exactly the same as the external. The calibration is only the average of a number of readings, generally at a high torque near the maximum capacity of the tool. When

any individual torque reading from the tool’s controller is compared to a torque reading from the external torque monitor, it can easily have a difference of several percent higher or lower. This means that the tool’s controller will start counting angle at a different point than the external torque/angle monitor starts counting. This could be five to 10 degrees different depending of the hardness of the joint. The only way to get consistent results when validating an angle reading against an external monitor is to pre- torque the joint slightly higher than the snug torque. Run the tool on this already-tightened joint, with the snug torque set to the same value in both the controller and the monitor, even if the tool’s transducer and the external transducer do not exactly agree near the snug torque, they will both start counting angle just before the fastener starts to rotate, so their zero angle will be synchronized exactly. For example, if a brake line fitting requires six NM plus 40 degrees, pre-torque the joint to seven NM first. Then change to an Angle Control strategy, with six NM snug torque, plus 40 degrees angle target, and reset the external torque/angle monitor. Then as the tool is run in this angle control mode, the tool will start counting angle as soon as it has six NM (which might have been five or seven NM according to the external transducer), which is before the joint actually starts to rotate. And the external monitor will start counting angle as soon as it has six NM which is also before the joint starts to rotate. This way, both meters are reading angle from the same point, even though the torque readings may differ slightly because of the allowable tolerances in the torque calibration.

After a torque control cycle, typically with multi-spindle applications or on a soft joint, one or more fasteners may be found to have low residual torque (indicating a loss of clamp load). This phenomenon can be caused by material flow, component embedment or relaxation within the individual joints, or by cross-talk. Cross-talk occurs when one fastener arrives at the target torque first, and as the surrounding fasteners are tightened, they can distort parts of the assembly such that the first fastener can lose some of its clamp load. The purpose of this fastening strategy is to re-torque all the fasteners in order to recover any clamp load that may have been lost during (or immediately after) the previous torque control step. This should then result in acceptable residual torque values for all fasteners in an assembly as well as consistent values across many assemblies. A simple solution is to wait a short time to allow for any relaxation to occur, and then run another torque control step. To not impact the fasteners, the torque should be increased at a controlled rate. This is done by ramping up the current limit to the level necessary to deliver the target torque. This re-torque step ends when the target torque is reached. The fastener may or may not rotate, depending on if it did, or did not, experience relaxation. Any fastener that did relax will have its lost torque recovered during this torque recovery step. In order to report the peak dynamic torque from this multi-step fastening cycle, the controller monitors if the fastener actually advances during the torque recovery step. If the fastener does rotate, then the peak torque from the torque recovery step should be reported as the peak dynamic torque for that cycle. If the fastener does not rotate during the torque recovery step, then the peak torque from the previous step should be reported as the peak dynamic torque for that cycle. To report the final tightening angle beyond the snug torque, we need to report the total angle for both the torque control step and the torque recovery step.

The process of tightening a fastener involves stretching, or preloading, the bolt to allow it to store enough force to hold the assembled parts together. Preloading the bolt to a higher load will hold the assembled parts together with more clamp force. Preloading a fastener to the yield point of the bolt material will provide the maximum clamp force possible from each fastener.

Preloading a fastener to its yield point can also assure a static loading condition for the fastener when the service loads may exceed the preload available with other fastening methods, thereby reducing the risk of fatigue failures. A bolt acts like an extension spring. Within its elastic region, any increase in deflection will produce a proportional increase in load. But once the bolt is stretched beyond its elastic limit and into the plastic region, the same incremental amount of deflection will produce a proportionally smaller increase in load. As long as the bolt is preloaded within its elastic limit, no permanent deformation of the bolt will occur. When unloaded, it will return to its original length. But once the bolt is deflected beyond its elastic limit and into the plastic region, permanent elongation will occur. The yield point of a material is traditionally defined as the point at which 0.2% permanent elongation occurs. When tightening a fastener, the applied Torque is directly proportional to Load, and the Angle of rotation is directly related to the Deflection through the thread pitch. By monitoring the dynamic Torque and the Angle of rotation during a fastening cycle (beyond the initial free run-down and pull-up phases of a fastening cycle), the rate of change of Torque vs. Angle is directly related to the rate of change of Load vs. Deflection of the bolt material, thereby providing a convenient method for monitoring the onset of the elastic limit of the bolt material. The QPM Controller software can now detect this fastener yield point and stop the fastening process when this occurs.

This strategy is mainly used as prevailing torque monitoring. Monitor torque window monitors torque during an angle window somewhere within the rundown phase with reference to Snug Torque. Once the fastening cycle achieves snug torque of the step with Monitor torque window enabled, the QB Alpha controller then “looks back” to see if the torque at any time violated the Monitor torque window defined by Upper and Lower Torque and Angle limits. The achieved torque must enter the window between the Upper and Lower Torque values at the Upper Angle and must leave the window between the Upper and Lower Torque values at the Lower Angle. If the torque rose above the Upper Torque limit, or fell below the Lower Torque limit at any time in the monitoring window step, the fastening cycle is stopped at Snug Torque, the final torque is not achieved on the fastener and it is marked as a NOK fastening cycle. If the torque did not violate the Upper or Lower Torque limits the fastening cycle then continues Upper Angle = the distance, in degrees of rotation, previous to Snug Torque that BEGINS the Prevailing Torque Monitor window. Lower Angle = the distance, in degrees of rotation, previous to Snug Torque that ENDS the Prevailing Torque Monitor window.

Abort Timer The Fastening cycle aborts if the tool does not shutoff before this pre-selected time.

Acceleration How fast the controller changes the speed of the tool from 0 (stopped) to the rated speed.

Accept Tone Controls the tone made from the handle of handheld QPM tools for accepted Fastening cycles. Allows distinct tones for tools in adjacent workstations.

Allows Adaptive Tightening Control modes to be selected, so that consistent torque can be maintained over a wide range of joints. Manual downshift should be used when:

• High Prevailing Torques – Prevailing Torque > 20% of the Torque Set Point (TSP).

• High Starting Torque –Starting Torque > 20% of TSP.

Batch Count The number of Fastening cycles required to be within specified limits to complete a batch. The Run display shows the batch count and number of complete Fastening cycles.

Downshift Mode Disable: no downshift; Manual: Occurs at specified torque; ATC automatically adapts to the joint.

Downshift Speed Once the tool reaches the Downshift Torque point, the controller changes the operating speed of the tool from the initial Tool Speed to the Downshift Speed.

Downshift Torque The controller changes the operating speed of the tool from the initial Tool Speed to the Downshift Speed at the Downshift Torque level.

High Angle Anytime the peak angle recorded exceeds the High Angle, the Fastening cycle is recorded as a reject for high angle, the high angle light (red) illuminates and the Fastening cycle is given an overall status of NOK.

High Torque Anytime the peak torque recorded exceeds the High Torque, the Fastening cycle is record- ed as a reject for high torque, the high torque light (red) illuminates and the Fastening cycle is given an overall status of NOK.

Low Angle Anytime the peak angle recorded during the Angle Audit Step fails to reach the Low An- gle, the Fastening cycle is recorded as a reject for low angle, the low angle light (yellow) illuminates and the Fastening cycle is given an overall status of NOK.

Low Torque When the peak torque recorded fails to reach the Low Torque, the Fastening cycle is recorded as a reject for low torque, the low torque light (yellow) illuminates and the Fastening cycle is given an overall status of NOK.

MFP Mode Controls the operation of the multiple-function panel (MFP) on QPM tools.

The choices for handheld tools are Disable, Reverse (Disassembly), Parameter Select, Arming and Reset Reject. The default value is Disable.

PM Counter Records the number of Fastening cycles completed since the last time it was reset for Planned Maintenance.

PM Limit When the PM Counter exceeds the PM Limit, the controller provides a maintenance alert.

Parameter Set A Parameter Set is a collection of instructions that define how the tool should perform the tightening process. It may be selected from the keypad or 24V device such as a socket tray.

Reject Tone Controls the tone made from the handle of handheld QPM tools for rejected Fastening cycles. Allows distinct tones for tools in adjacent workstations.

Slow Seek helps engage the socket or fastener at a pre-selected speed, torque level and angular rotation. Once engaged, the Fastening cycle completes at a higher speed. Slow Seek prevents crossthreaded fasteners and previously secured fasteners from being counted in a batch.

Slow Seek

Snug Torque The controller begins to monitor the tool for angle at a preselected threshold torque. Any increase in angle after the snug point results in a corresponding increase in the tension or clamp load within the joint.

Soft Stop Soft stop minimizes the torque impulse to the operator during tool shutoff at the end of the Fastening cycle.

Speed The speed at which the tool operates during the initial portion of the Fastening cycle prior to ATC or downshift.

Spindle A spindle represents a connection to a hand held or fixtured tool connected to a control- ler.

Strategy Identifies what variables will be used to control the tool during a Fastening cycle.

Thread Direction Sets assembly direction to clockwise (CW) or counter clockwise (CCW).

Threshold Torque Sets the point at which the tool is "In Cycle". When the tool is "In Cycle" the tool and controller Fastening cycle status lights turn off, the controller displays dashes (-) for data, and the "In Cycle" output is turned on.

Tool Tones Distinctive sounds assigned to tool functions.

Torque Calibration Determines how torque values are assigned to the electrical signals from the torque transducer on the tool. This value is unique to each tool and changes over time.

Torque Target When the tool is being controlled for torque, the torque target instructs the controller when to shutoff the tool. The torque target should be greater than Low Torque and less than High Torque, and is required for torque control.

Trace A display plot of torque vs time (or angle) of a Fastening cycle.

Trip Counter Records the number of Fastening cycles completed since the last time it was reset. It is usually used as a supplementary count of the PM Counter.

The following torque units and associated labels are used with STANLEY controllers and tools. The labels are derived from SP811, SI Unit rules and style conventions from the National Institute of Standards and Technology

Nm Newton meter 1.355 818 1

Ncm Newton centimeter 135.581 8 100

Units

kgm Kilogram meter 0.138 255 2 0.101 971 6

kgcm Kilogram centimeter 13.825 52 10.197 16

ft lb Foot pound 1 0.737 562 1

in lb Inch pound 12 8.850 745

in oz inch ounce 192 141.611 9

Stanley Black&Decker, Inc. (“STANLEY”) warrants its Assembly Technologies mechanical products to the original purchaser to be free from deficiencies in material or workmanship for the useful life of the product. Under this lifetime limited warranty STANLEY will, at its discretion, repair or replace any product which, upon inspection, is acknowledged by STANLEY to be defective. This limited lifetime warranty shall apply to products which have been used under normal operating conditions for their intended use and shall not apply to products which have been subjected to: abnormal wear and tear, abuse, misuse, improper maintenance, negligence, continued use after partial failure, accident, alterations or repairs with non-genuine STANLEY replacement parts.

STANLEY warrants its Assembly Technologies electronic products to the original purchaser to be free from deficiencies in material or workmanship for a period of one year after the date of shipment. Under this limited warranty STANLEY will, at its discretion, repair or replace any product which, upon inspection, is acknowledged by STANLEY to be defective. This warranty shall apply to products which have been used under normal operating conditions for their intended use and shall not apply to products which have been subjected to: abnormal wear and tear, neglect, component degradation, improper handling, overload, abuse, misuse, improper maintenance, use with improper accessories, or where alterations have been made.

STANLEY warrants its Assembly Technologies software products to the original purchaser to be free from deficiencies in material or workmanship for a period of one year after the date of shipment. Under this limited warranty STANLEY will, at its discretion, make available replacement software or an upgrade for any product which, upon inspection, is acknowledged by STANLEY to be defective. Installation of the software shall be the responsibility of the requestor. This warranty shall apply to products which have been used with specified, compatible hardware under normal operating conditions for their intended use and shall not apply to products which have been: modified, misused, improperly handled, improperly maintained, or used with non-compatible hardware or accessories.

Some STANLEY Assembly Technologies custom engineered systems include components manufactured by others. The limited warranties of each individual manufacturer shall apply to these components and STANLEY makes no representation or warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, with respect to such components.

This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights and is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Some states and countries do not allow limitations on implied warranties, so the above may not apply to you. You may also have other rights which vary by state or country. STANLEY shall not be responsible for incidental or consequential damages or the inability to use its products for any purpose whatsoever. STANLEY’s maximum liability shall not in any case exceed the contract price for the products claimed to be defective. Some states and countries do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so this specific limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.

STANLEY retains the right to discontinue and/or change specifications of any Assembly Technologies products without responsibility for incorporating changes in products already sold.

To apply for warranty consideration, the original purchaser should take the following action: a. Contact the STANLEY Assembly Technologies customer service department to obtain a “Return Authorization Number” and “Warranty Claim Report Form.” b. Package the product including proof of purchase and the completed warranty claim form. c. Note the Return Authorization Number on the exterior of the package and return freight to: ................................................................... STANLEY Assembly Technologies Central Repair Facility 5335 Avion Park Drive Cleveland, Ohio 44143-2328 In the event that a product is repaired or replaced under the terms of the warranty, the warranty period of the repaired or replacement product shall be limited to the remaining portion of the original warranty period.

STANLEY provides full services for design, modification, service, repair, and training on STANLEY products. Contact STANLEY Assembly Technologies or their agents for information on training courses to aid users in becoming familiar with operations, maintenance, or programming of the STANLEY DC electric tools and controllers. No modification of STANLEY tools and controllers can be made without the express permission of STANLEY Assembly Technologies. Refer all service to STANLEY Assembly Technologies, or their representatives.

A Return Material Authorization or RMA is required before returning any material for warranty or repair service. • Contact STANLEY Assembly Technologies or their agents. • Request Customer Service or Repair Services.

Have the following information available for the person answering the telephone to obtain an RMA: • Company name and address. • A contact name and telephone number. If possible, have facsimile and pager numbers (if any) available. • The STANLEY model number, serial number, and description for the item • A short description of the problem.

Type can be Normally Open (N.O.) or Normally Closed (N.C.). If an input’s contact type is normally open, the input is asserted when 24V DC is applied to the 24V DC connector input pin, or when the fieldbus bit transitions from low to high. If an input’s contact type is normally closed, the input is asserted when 24V DC is removed from the 24V DC connector input pin, or when the fieldbus bit transitions from high to low. The Input functions assert on the transition only. Job or Task selection can come from multiple inputs at once, including the MFB. There is no priority, each one is equal. The Alpha controller switches its active Job or Task with each input change. The last one to change becomes the active Job or Task. Spindle – Indicates to which spindle in the multi-spindle system this function applies.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the controller disables the tool while this specific job is selected. This acts like a STOP to stop the tool during use. Use the JOB parameter under Configuration to select the job to be disabled while this input is asserted.

When removed the tool will be allowed to run while this specific job is selected.

Size: 1 bit

DISABLE JOB

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Job: Type the job number to select when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the Job is to be disabled.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the tool is disabled while this specific task is selected. This acts like a STOP to stop the tool during use. Use the Task parameter under Configuration to select the disabled task.

When removed, the tool will be allowed to run while this specific task is selected.

Size: 1 bit

DISABLE TASK

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Task: Type the task number to disable when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the Task is to be disabled.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller prevents the tool from running. It does NOT stop the tool if the tool is running, but prevents it from running when the next START signal is applied. The START input can come from any bus or the tool trigger.

When removed the tool is allowed to run after the next START input.

DISABLE TOOL

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the tool is to be disabled.

IGNORE The input is not used. This is a placeholder. For fieldbus, the length of this input function may be set to any size that meets the need.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected job number is equal to this input’s job number. Use the JOB parameter under Configuration to select the job number to verify. If the wrong job is selected the tool is disabled.

When removed, verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit

JOB VERIFY

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Job: Type the job number to verify when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the job is to be verified.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected and active job is equal to this input’s job. Use the BIT parameter under Configuration to select the job number to verify. If there is a mismatch between the active job number and this input’s job number the tool is disabled. This is one bit of a binary number created by many of these bits. See SELECT TASK BIT to understand how to use bits to create binary numbers.

When removed verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

JOB VERIFY BIT

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit to be in the binary number scheme to verify a job.

Mode: All JOB VERIFY BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) plus 1.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the job is to be verified.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any fieldbus input, the controller reads the new PART ID input and places the data into the Part ID buffer. This is added to the fastening cycle data and stored in the controller. This input function is NOT available on the 24V DC input bus.

Size: Can be any size from 1 to 32 bytes.

*PART ID

When removed nothing happens.

Configuration:

Length: Type the length of the expected data string in bits.

Spindle: Type the spindle number to receive the PART ID data.

When asserted, on any input, the controller resets the accumulated bolt count to zero for the active job and acts as a part entry to re-enable the tool if disabled. The tool could be disabled due to “Error Proofing” and the accumulat- ed bolt count equal to target bolt count.

When removed nothing happens.

RESET JOB

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the job is to be reset.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller resets to 0 (zero) any fastening cycle results status output bit on the same bus. Meaning, if asserted on DeviceNet, only the DeviceNet output status bits are reset. Output status bits on other buses will remain in their original state.

The list of status bits that will reset are:

CYCLE OK CYCLE NOK

TORQUE OK TORQUE HIGH

TORQUE LOW ANGLE OK

ANGLE HIGH ANGLE LOW

RESET RESULT STATUS

CYCLE ABORTED CYCLE STOP

CURRENT OK CURRENT HIGH

CURRENT LOW

When removed nothing happens.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the result status is to be reset.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the tool is placed in Reverse (disassembly) mode. This does NOT run the tool in Reverse mode, it changes the tool mode from Forward to Reverse. If one input is required to do both functions, see REVERSE START.

When removed, from any input type, the controller places the tool into Forward (assembly) mode.

REVERSE

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for the tool to be put into reverse.

Inputs Description

When asserted, on any input type, the controller makes this input’s Job the active Job.

When removed either nothing happens or if “Disable when open” is set to yes, then the tool becomes disabled.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SELECT JOB

Job: Type the job number to select when this input is asserted.

Disable when open:

Yes – Disables the tool when this input is removed.

No – Does not disable the tool upon input removal.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the job is to be selected.

When asserted or removed on any input type, the controller selects a job. This is one bit, in a series of bits, to create a binary number.

See SELECT TASK (BIT) function description for explanation of this bit (note that this references Jobs not Tasks).

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SELECT JOB (BIT)

Bit: Type the number of this bit, in the binary number scheme, to select jobs.

Mode: All JOB SELECT BITs must be the same mode, modes cannot be mixed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and adds the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the job is to be selected.

When asserted, on any input type, the controller makes this input’s Task the active Task.

When removed either nothing happens or if “Disable when open” is selected as yes, then the tool becomes dis- abled.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SELECT TASK

Task: Type the Task number to select when this input is asserted.

Disable when open:

Yes – Disables the tool when this input is removed.

No – Does not disable the tool upon input removal.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the task is to be selected.

Inputs Description

When asserted or removed, on any input bus, the controller selects a Task. This is one bit, in a series of bits, to create a binary number.

The number created by this and other SELECT TASK BITs determines the active task for the tool. More than one input assigned as a TASK SELECT BIT creates a number greater than one. The maximum number of tasks required determines the maximum number of these inputs.

In binary numbers, the digit furthest to the right is the ones digit. The next digit to the left is the twos digit, next is the fours digit, then the eights digit, and so on. The integer equivalent to a binary number can be found by summing all the weighted values of the selected digits. For example, the binary number 10101 is equivalent to the integer 21. The math is 1 + 4 + 16 = 21: the high digits (one) are added together and the low digits (zero) are ignored.

Bit Number 4 3 2 1 0

Weighted Value 16 8 4 2 1

Binary Number 1 0 1 0 1

SELECT TASK (BIT)

24V DC Pins (example) R P N M L

To select task #21 on the controller at least five inputs are assigned as TASK SELECT (BIT). Each would then be given a bit number to have a series of bits with different weighted values. For example, on the 24 VDC input pin L is bit 0, pin M is bit 1, pin N is bit 2, pin P is bit 3, and pin R is bit 4. Therefore, to select task #21, assert pins L, N and R.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number of this bit, in the binary number scheme, to select tasks.

Mode: All TASK SELECT BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and adds the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the task is to be selected.

When asserted, on any Input type, the Zero Position for the tool is set. This Zero Position is used in the Position Control strategy to stop the tool at the Zero Position after meeting the Snug Torque value.

Size: 1 bit

SET ZERO POSITION

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number in which the Zero Positions is to be set.

Inputs Description

When asserted, on any input type, the tool starts and runs the currently selected job/task. This input is overridden by the STOP input. If STOP is used and a tool restart is required, remove the STOP, remove the START, then re-assert the START. If the tool is required to operate in Disassembly mode, remove the START, assert the REVERSE input, and then re-assert the START.

When removed, from any bus of Input, the tool stops. Even if a second START input is active, the tool stops when any START is removed.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

START

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Latch: This is applicable to external inputs only. This is not applicable to the trigger on the tool handle.

Yes – Causes the START input to latch internally after a time period has elapsed. The physical START input can be removed without stopping the tool. The tool runs until all steps in the active task are complete or time out. A TIME parameter is available to set how long the START input must be applied, in seconds, before the Latch becomes active.

No – The Latch function is off.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for tool to be started.

When asserted on any input bus, the tool mode is switched to Reverse (Disassembly) AND the tool is started. This is different from the REVERSE input function in that REVERSE puts the tool into Reverse mode only.

When removed the tool stops and switches back to Forward mode.

START RE- VERSE

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for tool to be reversed.

When asserted, on any input type, the controller stops the tool. It also prevents the tool from running while it is applied.

When removed nothing happens other than the tool runs.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Spindle: Type the spindle number for tool to be stopped.

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected and active task is equal to this input’s task. Use the TASK parameter under Configuration to select the task number to verify. If the wrong task is selected the tool is disabled.

When removed, verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit

TASK VERIFY

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Task: Type the task number to verify when this input is asserted.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the task is to be verified.

Inputs Description

When asserted on any input bus, the controller verifies the selected task number is equal to this input’s task num- ber. Use the BIT parameter under Configuration to select the task number to verify. If there is a mismatch between the active task and the selected task the tool is disabled. This is one bit of a binary number created by many of these bits. See SELECT TASK BIT to understand how to use bits to create binary numbers.

When removed verification will not happen.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be size any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

TASK VERIFY BIT

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit will be in the binary number scheme to verify a task.

Mode: All TASK VERIFY BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and add the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number for which the task is to be verified.

* Outputs not available on 24 VDC

Expert, Specialist, Advanced, Network Node, and Standard + Alpha controllers contain a 24V DC Input and Output Connector. Each of the output functions has Configuration settings: Contact types, Output types and others. It is recommended to configure them immediately once the output functions are assigned to a pin. Contact Type The Contact Type can be Normally Open (N.O.) or Normally Closed (N.C.). Sourcing Outputs (PNP type) If an output’s contact type is normally open and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 0V DC to 24V DC. If an output’s contact type is normally closed and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 24V DC to 0V DC. Sinking Outputs (NPN type) If an output’s contact type is normally open and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 24V DC to 0V DC. If an output’s contact type is normally closed and the output is asserted, the output pin transitions from 0V DC to 24V DC. Output Type The Output Type defines the behavior of the output signal. Normal – The output asserts and stays asserted until a reset condition occurs. Minimum On Time – Keeps the output asserted for this minimum time in seconds, even though a reset condition occurs. After the timer is finished, the output resets if a reset condition has occurred, otherwise it remains asserted until a reset condition occurs. Timed – The output asserts for this period of time, then resets on its own without waiting for the reset condition to occur. Time – Units are in seconds. Flash – The output flashes for as long as it is asserted. Period – Sets the flashing on and off times, which are equal. Units are in seconds Spindle – Indicates from which spindle in the multi-spindle system this function comes.

Outputs Description

This output is the peak achieved angle value during the fastening cycle from the Audit step. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*ANGLE

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle value comes.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved angle value is above the High Angle limit for the Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

ANGLE HIGH

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved angle value is below the Low Angle limits for the Au- dit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

ANGLE LOW

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved angle value is within limits for the Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

ANGLE OK

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

Outputs Description

This output will be one of three selections. The selections are the User Defined Value for the associated angle status of the last fastening cycle. For example: if the last fastening cycle’s angle status was Low, and the User Defined Value for Low is -, then this output value is-.

The OK User Defined Value is selected when the achieved angle for the defined Step are within specified limits.

The Low User Defined Value is selected when the achieved angle for the defined Step is below the Low Angle limit.

The High User Defined Value is selected when the achieved angle, for the defined Step, is above the High Angle limit.

It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

*ANGLE STATUS

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

OK: User Defined Value

Low: User Defined Value

High: User Defined Value

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the angle status comes.

This output is the value of the active accumulated bolt count. As the bolt count changes so does this output.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

*BOLT

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the bolt status comes.

Outputs Description

This value is defined by the end user in the Constant parameter. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*CONSTANT

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Constant: Type the value of the constant required

Asserts when the controller shuts the tool off due to a fault or if the Stop/Abort within Limits parameter is used and the fastening cycle has a shutoff code of ABORT. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE ABORTED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the abort status comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and/or angle for the Audit step are NOT within specified limits. Also asserts when the Stop/Abort within Limits parameter is set to Yes and the tool is stopped or aborted within limits. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE NOK

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and angle for the Audit step are within specified limits. Will not assert if the Stop/Abort within Limits parameter is set to Yes and the tool is stopped or aborted within limits. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE OK

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the tool shuts off due to a loss of Start signal or the operator released the trigger before the target was achieved. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

CYCLE STOPPED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Asserts when the tool is running in Reverse and the achieved torque value exceeds the Threshold Torque value through some rotation. Resets when the tool is stopped.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

DISASSEMBLY DETECTED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the disassembly status comes.

Outputs Description

This output is the number value of the fault code present in the controller. It asserts when a fault is active and resets when the fault clears. The values are as follows:

1 – Overcurrent Fault! 2 – Logic Voltage Fault!

3 – Position Feedback Fault! 4 – Transducer Span Fault!

5 – Temperature Fault! 6 – Unrecognized Tool!

7 – Tool Communications! 8 – Transducer Current Fault!

9 – Transducer Zero Fault! 10 – Unused

11 – Unused 12 – Unused

*FAULT CODE

13 – Unsupported Tool! 14 – GFI Fault!

15 – Servo Connection Fault!

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the fault code comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when there is a fault on the controller. Resets when the fault clears.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

FAULTED

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the fault comes.

Mimics the Green status lights on the tool.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

GREEN LIGHT

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Asserts during the fastening cycle when the achieved torque value exceeds the Threshold Torque value. Resets when the fastening cycle has ended.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

IN CYCLE

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the tool’s operation is set to Reverse. Resets when the tool’s operation is set to Forward.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

IN REVERSE

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when a job is completed (accumulated bolt count equals target bolt count). NOTE: not all bolts may be OK. Resets when a different job is selected or when the input RESET JOB is asserted.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

JOB COMPLETE

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a job is completed (accumulated bolt count equals target bolt count) and all bolts are OK. Resets when a different job is selected or when the input RESET JOB is asserted.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

JOB OK

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a job is selected by any means. Resets when the active job is complete.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

JOB SELECTED

Job: Type the job number that, when selected, asserts this output.

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when required to indicate the active job. This is one bit in a series of bits to create a binary number. As jobs change so will the binary number created from these bits.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit to be in the binary number scheme for selected jobs.

JOB SELECTED BIT

Mode: All JOB SELECTED BITs must be the same mode, modes cannot be mixed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and adda the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the tool’s Multi-function Button is pressed. Resets when the Multi-function Button is released.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

MULTI-FUNCTION BUTTON

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

NOT USED The output is not used. This is essentially a placeholder.

For fieldbus, the length of this input function may be set to any size that meets the need.

This output is the value of the selected Parameter. It changes when the parameter changes.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

*PARAMETER

Parameter: Strategy, Torque Target, High Torque, Low Torque, Angle Target, High Angle, Low Angle, Snug Torque, Speed, Step Name, Torque Cal, Tool Serial Number, Torque Bailout, Angle Bailout, Downshift Torque, Downshift Speed, Tool Model Number, Task Name, Job Name, Task Bolt Count.

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This value is equal to and changes as the PART ID input changes.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

*PART ID

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when the Preventive Maintenance Count in the tool’s memory has exceeded the Preventive Mainte- nance Threshold. Resets when the Preventive Maintenance Count is reset to zero.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when there is no fault on the controller and the tool is ready to run. This output resets when the tool is disabled. The blue light on the controller and tool will illuminate when this output is on.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

READY

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Mimics the Red status lights on the tool.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

RED LIGHT

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Outputs Description

This is the accumulated bolt count value of the last fastening cycle. It asserts when the fastening cycle is com- plete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN BOLT

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the day value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN DAY

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the hour value of the last fastening cycle time. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN HOUR

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This value indicates the job in which the last fastening cycle was performed. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN JOB

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the minute value of the last fastening cycle time. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN MINUTE

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This is the month value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN MONTH

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This is the PART ID value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN PART ID

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the second value of the last fastening cycle time. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN SECOND

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This output will be one of two selections. The selections are the User Defined Value for the associated status of the last fastening cycle. For example: if the last fastening cycle status was OK, and the User Defined Value for OK is Good, then this output value is Good.

The OK User Defined Value asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and angle for the Audit step are within specified limits.

The NOK User Defined Value asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque and angle for the Audit step are NOT within specified limits.

The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

*RUNDOWN STATUS

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

OK: User Defined Value

NOK: User Define Value

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This value indicates the task in which the last fastening cycle was performed. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN TASK

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This is the numeric equivalent value of the torque units of the last fastening cycle. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (after the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

The numeric equivalent values are:

0 – NM

1 – FTLB

2 – INLB

3 – INOZ

*RUNDOWN UNITS

4 – KGM

5 - KGCM

6 – NCM

7 – NDM

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This is the year value of the last fastening cycle date. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

*RUNDOWN YEAR

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle if the achieved torque value exceeds the Snug Torque value during the fastening cycle. Resets when the tool is commanded to run again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

SNUG ACHIEVED

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when the tool’s trigger is pressed. Resets when the tool trigger is released.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

START TRIGGER

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of the fastening cycle to indicate the last step ran. This is one bit, in a series of bits, to create a binary number.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Bit: Type the number this bit will be in the binary number scheme for steps.

STEP (BIT)

Mode: All STEP BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and add the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when the STOP input is received, or anytime the tool is stopped. Resets when the STOP input or the Stop Tool Operation is reset. The

icon is on when this output is on.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

STOPPED

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a task is complete (all bolts assigned to task are OK). Resets when a task is selected.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TASK COMPLETE

Task: Type the task number that, when completed, asserts this output.

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Asserts when a task is selected by any means. Resets when the active task is complete.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TASK SELECTED

Task: Type the task number that, when selected, asserts this output.

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts when required to indicate the active task. This is one bit in a series of bits to create a binary number. As tasks change so will the binary number created from these bits.

Size: 1 bit, except on fieldbus where it can be any size to fit the need.

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TASK SELECTED BIT

Bit: Type the number this bit will be in the binary number scheme for selected tasks.

Mode: All TASK SELECTED BITs must be the same mode, no mixing of modes allowed.

Binary – Creates a decimal number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s).

Binary + 1 – Creates a number equivalent to the weighted value of this binary bit(s) and add the value of one (1) to that number.

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal come s.

Asserts anytime the tool is energized. Resets when the tool is commanded to stop.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

TOOL RUNNING

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

This output is the peak achieved torque value during the fastening cycle from the Audit step. It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

*TORQUE

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal come s.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque value is above the High Torque limit for the Au- dit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TORQUE HIGH

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque value is below the Low Torque limits Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TORQUE LOW

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal come s.

Asserts at the end of a fastening cycle when the achieved torque value is within limits for the Audit step. Resets when the tool is commanded to start again. Can also be reset with the RESET RESULTS STATUS input.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

TORQUE OK

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audut-2

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Outputs Description

This output will be one of three selections. The selections are the User Defined Value for the associated torque status of the last fastening cycle. For example: if the last fastening cycle’s torque status was High, and the User Defined Value for High is +, then this output value is +.

The OK User Defined Value is selected when the achieved torque for the defined step are within specified limits.

The Low User Defined Value is selected cycle when the achieved torque for the defined Step is below the Low Torque limit.

The High User Defined Value is selected when the achieved torque for the defined step is above the High Torque limit.

It asserts when the fastening cycle is complete (before the IN CYCLE bit resets). The value resets to zero (0) when the tool is commanded to run again.

* TORQUE STATUS

Size: Can be any size from 0 to 32 bytes depending on Data Type

Configuration:

Data Type: Float, Int8, Int16, Int32, Fixed Point, String

OK: User Defined Value

Low: User Defined Value

High: User Defined Value

Step: Audit, Audit-1, Audit-2

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the signal comes.

Mimics the Yellow status lights on the tool.

Size: 1 bit

Configuration:

Contact Type: Normally Open (N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.)

YELLOW LIGHT

Output Type: Normal, Timed, Flash

Minimum ON Time, Time, Period

Spindle: Type the spindle number from which the cycle status comes.

Outputs Description

* Outputs not available on 24 VDC

The fieldbus Modbus TCP comes as a standard feature on the Ethernet port in Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha controllers. This is a Modbus variant used for communications over TCP/IP networks, connecting over virtual port 502. By default the Modbus TCP fieldbus does not have any I/O assigned. See section “3.3.7 I/O Tab” on page 96 to learn how to edit the I/O. See section “6.12 Assignable Input and Output Functions” on page 130 to learn about the values to edit. There is no configuration or programming specifically for the Modbus protocol itself. The Alpha’s CPU takes care of all the protocol’s overhead and handshaking requirements. The QB Alpha controllers supports the following public Modbus function codes: 01 (0x01) Read Coils 02 (0x02) Read Discsreet Inputs 03 (0x03) Read Holding Registers 04 (0x04) Read Input Registers 05 (0x05) Write Single Coil 06 (0x06) Write Single Register 15 (0x0F) Write Multiple Coils 16 (0x10) Write Multiple Registers Please visit http://Modbus.org for more information about the Modbus fieldbus. Use the following table to correlate the external PLC addressing to the controller’s inputs and outputs.

Memory Type Controller I/O Type External PLC Ad- dress Data Type External PLC

Read/ Write

“1” Coil Input 10001 - 20256 Bit Read/ Write

“2” Input Output 20001 - 20256 Bit(s) Read

"3" Holding Register Input 30001 - 30256 Mixed Read/ Write

"4" Input Register Output 40001 - 40256 Mixed Read

“5” Force Single Coil Input 50001 - 50256 Bit Read/ Write

"6" Single Register Input 60001 - 60256 Mixed Read/ Write

“15” Force Multiple Coils Input 0F0001 - 0F0256 Bit(s) Read/ Write

"16" Multiple Register Input 100001 - 100256 Mixed Read/ Write

For Mixed Data Type the type of data depends on the user assigned input and output functions. It is important to understand that the coils and registers use the same memory.

External PLC Alpha Controller

Address # Modbus Input* Assigned Function Length (Bits)

30001:0 0/0 Start 1

30001:1 0/1 Stop 1

30001:2 0/2 Reverse 1

30001:3 0/3 Job Select (Bit) 0 1

30001:4 0/4 Job Select (Bit) 1 1

30001:5 0/5 Job Select (Bit) 2 1

30001:6, 7 0/6 Ignored 2

30001:8 - 15 1/0 Ignored 8

30002 2/0 Part ID (ASCII) 80

# Register:Bit *Byte/Bit

External PLC Alpha Controller

Address # Modbus Output* Assigned Function Length (Bits)

40001:0 0/0 Fault 1

40001:1 0/1 Ready 1

40001:2 0/2 Tool Running 1

40001:3 0/3 In Cycle 1

40001:4 0/4 Cycle OK 1

40001:5 0/5 Cycle NOK 1

40001:6, 7 0/6 Not Used 2

40001:8 -15 1/0 Not Used 8

40002 2/0 Torque (Float) 32

40004 6/0 Angle (Float) 32

# Register:Bit *Byte/Bit

Integer, Float and ASCII data must start on a zero (first) bit of a byte and not in the middle of a byte. Function code 04 (0x04) can only transmit a 16-bit register, not the individual bits within a register. The PLC will need to capture the 16-bit register and then parse the individual bits after receipt.

Each Alpha Controller has an internal software PLC. This PLC serves to enhance the integration of the Alpha controller into an end user’s plant. The PLC emulates the Allen Bradley SLC-504 controller and uses many of the same layouts, addressing structures and commands. Alpha Toolbox has a PLC editor but RSLogix500 can also be used to program ladder logic for the embedded PLC.

The Alpha controller’s PLC has a 4-slot virtual rack layout. There are some differences between a SLC-504 rack and the Alpha rack. The CPU card does not have its own slot, rather it is taken into account since it is embedded and cannot be changed. The discreet 24 VDC I/O uses the same slot rather than separate input or output “cards”. The virtual rack is filled as follows:

The 24V DC I/O Module in slot 0 reflects the physical I/O on the Alpha. The Trailing Fieldbus card in slot #2 uses the M-12 DeviceNet connector on the bottom of the Alpha when the DeviceNet option is ordered. The DB-9 connector is used when Profibus is ordered. The RJ-45 jacks are used when Ethernet/IP or Profinet are ordered.

The ModbusTCP card in slot #1 comes installed as standard equipment on Expert, Specialist, and Advanced Alpha controllers. Each uses the RJ-45 ETHERNET jack on the bottom of the Alpha. The optional DeviceNet Scanner card in slot #3 can be configured to auto-map the devices connected to it. This card uses the M-5

DeviceNet connector on the bottom of the Alpha if this option is ordered.

As ASCII it would be: SOR XIC I:0.0/0 OTE 0.0/0 EOR See section “6.11 Input and Output Connector” on page 126 for PLC addressing of the 24V DC connector.

See Tabel 1 and Table 2 for a listing of supported instructions and file types. NOTE: The Alpha controller supports only one ladder in the program file. Jump commands are not supported so all logic must be performed in one ladder. Table 1: Supported Instructions

Instruction Descriptions Instruction Descriptions Instruction Descriptions

ABS Absolute CTU Count Up NOT Not

ACI String to Integer DIV Divide NXB Next Branch

ACL ASCII Clear Buffer END Program End OR OR

ACN String Concatenate EOR End of Rung OSR One-Shot Rising

ADD Add EQU Equal OTE Output Energize

AEX String Extract GEQ Greater Than or Equal OTL Output Latch

AIC Integer to String GRT Greater Than OUT Output Unlatch

AND And LEQ Less Than or Equal RES Reset

ARD ASCII Read Characters LES Less Than RTO Retentive Timer

ASC String search LIM Limit Test SOR Start of Rung

ASR ASCII String Compare MEQ Masked Comparison for Equal SUB Subtract

AWT ASCII Write MOV Move TOF Timer Off-Delay

BND Branch End MUL Multiply TON Timer On-Delay

BST Branch Start MVM Masked Move XIC Examine if Closed

CLR Clear NEG Negate XIO Examine if Open

CTD Count Down NEQ Not Equal XOR Exclusive OR

Table 2 Supported Files

O0 OUTPUT

I1 INPUT

B3 BINARY

T4 TIMER

C5 COUNTER

R6 CONTROL

N7 INTEGER

ST14 STRING

Instructions Description

ABS Absolute Calculates the absolute value of the source and places the result in the destination.

Instructions Description

ACI String to Integer Use the ACI instruction to convert a numeric ASCII string to an integer value between -32,768 and 32,767.

ACL ASCII Clear Buffer Clears the send and/or the receive buffers.

ACN String Concatenate Combines two strings using ASCII strings as operands. The second string is appended to the first and the result stored in the destination.

ADD Use the ADD instruction to add one value (source A) to another value (source B) and place the result in the destination.

String Extract Use the AEX instruction to create a new string by taking a portion of an existing string and moving it to the new string. Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction. • Source is the existing string. The source value is not affected by this instruction. • Index is the starting position (from 1 to 82) of the string to extract (an index of 1 indi- cates the left-most character of the string). • Number is the number of characters (from 1 to 82) to extract (startis at the indexed position). If the index plus the number is greater than the total characters in the source string, the destination string will be the characters from the index to the end of the source string. • Destination is the string function (ST14:X) where the extracted string is stored.

AIC Integer to String Converts an integer value, between -32,768 and 32,767, to an ASCII string.

AND Performs a bit-by-bit logical AND. The operation is performed using the value at source A and the value at source B. The result is stored in the destination.

ASCII read characters Performs a read from a source channel and moves the value into a destination string. Provides a Result integer for the status of the read. Channel 0 = Serial port Channel 2 = Ethernet port The internal PLC supports reading from and writing to the Network Ethernet port on the con- trollers. Here are the rules: If Channel ID is set to 2 then the virtual port 8786 will be used. If a Channel ID >1024 is used then that number is the virtual port used. Only one virtual port can be used and the first rung in the logic with an ARD or ARW command with a Channel ID >1024 determines which virtual port will be used. The Channel ID cannot be set to an address, it must be an integer.

Instructions Description

String Search Use the ASC instruction to search an existing string for an occurrence of the source string. Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction: • Source is the string you want to find when examining the search string. • Index is the starting position (from 1 to 82) of the source string. (An index of 1 indi- cates the left-most character of the string.) • Search is the string you want to examine. • Result is an integer where the processor stores the position of the search string where the source string begins. If no match is found, result is set equal to zero.

ASCII String Compare Use the ASR instruction to compare two ASCII strings. The system looks for a match in length and upper/lower case characters. If two strings are identical, the rung is true; if there are any differences, the rung is false.

ASCII Write Writes a source string to the designated channel. Provides a Result integer for the status of the write. Channel 0 = Serial port Channel 1 = Display Channel 2 = Ethernet The internal PLC supports reading from and writing to the Network Ethernet port on the con- trollers. Here are the rules: If Channel ID is set to 2 then the virtual port 8786 will be used. If a Channel ID >1024 is used then that number is the virtual port used. Only one virtual port can be used and the first rung in the logic with an ARD or ARW command with a Channel ID >1024 determines which virtual port will be used. The Channel ID cannot be set to an address, it must be an integer.

BND Branch End Marks the end of a branch.

BST Branch Start Marks the beginning of a new branch on a rung.

CLR Clear Sets the value of a destination word to zero.

Instructions Description

Count Down Counts false-to-true transitions. When rung conditions for a CTD instruction have made a false-to-true transition, the accumu- lated value is decremented by one count, provided that the rung containing the CTD instruction is evaluated between these transitions. The accumulated counts are retained when the rung conditions again becomes false. The accu- mulated count is retained until cleared by a reset (RES) instruction that has the same address as the counter reset.

A RES instruction having the same address as the CTD instruction is executed OR the count is increment- ed greater than or equal to +32,767 with a CTU instruction Done Bit DN (Bit 13) Accumulated value is equal to or greater than the preset value The accumulated value becomes less than the preset value Count Down Enable Bit CU (Bit 14) rung conditions are true Rung conditions go false or a RES instruction having the same address as the CTD instruction is enabled

Count Down Underflow Bit OV (Bit 11)

Accumulated value wraps around to +32,768 from -32,767

Count Up Counts false-to-true rung transitions. When rung conditions for a CTU instruction have made a false-to-true transition, the accumu- lated value is incremented by one count, provided that the rung containing the CTU instruction is evaluated between these transitions. The accumulated value is retained when the rung conditions again become false. The accumu- lated count is retained until cleared by a reset (RES) instruction that has the same address as the counter reset. The count value must remain in the range of -32768 to 32767. If the count value goes above 32767 the overflow (OV) bit is set. If the count value goes below -32768, the counter status underflow (UN) bit is set. A counter can be reset to zero using the reset (RES) instruction.

A RES instruction having the same address as the CTU instruction is executed OR the count is dec- remented less than or equal to +32,767 with a CTD instruction Done Bit DN (Bit 13) Accumulated value is equal to or greater than the preset value The accumulated value becomes less than the preset value

Count Up Over- flow Bit OV (Bit 12)

Accumulated value wraps around to -32,768 from +32,767

Count Up Enable Bit CU (Bit 15) Rung conditions are true Rung conditions go false or a RES instruction having the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled

Instructions Description

Divide Use the DIV instruction to divide one value (source A) by another (source B). The rounded quo- tient is then placed in the destination. If the remainder is 0.5 or greater, round up occurs in the destination. The unrounded quotient is stored in the most significant word of the math register. The remainder is placed in the least significant word of the math register.

END Program End Marks the end of the program.

EOR End of Rung Marks the end of a rung.

Equal Use the EQU instruction to test whether two values are equal. If source A and source B are equal, the instruction is logically true. If these values are not equal, the instruction is logically false.

Greater than or Equal Use the GEQ instruction to test whether one value (source A) is greater than or equal to another (source B). If the value at source A is greater than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is less than the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Greater Than Use the GRT instruction to test whether one value (source A) is greater than another (source B). If the value at source A is greater than the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is less than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Less Than or Equal Use the LEQ instruction to test whether one value (source A) is less than or equal to another (source B). If the value at source A is less than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is greater than the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Less Than Use the LES instruction to test whether one value (source A) is less than another (source B). If source A is less than the value at source B, the instruction is logically true. If the value at source A is greater than or equal to the value at source B, the instruction is logically false.

Limit Test Use the LIM instruction to test for values within or outside a specified range, depending on how limits are set. If the Low Limit has a value equal to or less than the High Limit, the instruction is true when the Test value is between the limits or is equal to either limit. If the Test value is outside the limits, the instruction is false.

Instructions Description

Masked Comparison for Equal Use the MEQ instruction to compare data at a source address with data at a compare address. Use of this instruction allows portions of the data to be masked by a separate word. The source is the address of the value to compare. The mask is the address of the mask through which the instruction moves data. The mask can also be a hexadecimal value (constant). The compare is an integer value or the address of the reference. If the 16 bits of data at the source address are equal to the 16 bits of data at the compare address (less masked bits), the instruction is true.

Message Use MSG to send an instruction directly to the CPU. Can be used to send messages to trailing Alpha controllers. Proper syntax is required. Text editor syntax: MSG # XXXXH HW LW: where # is spindle number, XXXXH is the command, HW is High Word and LW is Low Word. High Words and Low Words contain information provid- ed by the instruction. The user must be trained by a STANLEY trainer to use this instruction.

Monitor Use MON to monitor for a CPU event and use as a trigger. Can be used to send messages to trailing Alpha controllers. Proper syntax is required. Text editor syntax: MSG # XXXXH HW LW: where # is spindle number, XXXXH is the command, HW is High Word and LW is Low Word. High Words and Low Words contain information provid- ed by the instruction. The user must be trained by a STANLEY trainer to use this instruction.

MOV Move This output instruction moves the source value to the destination location. As long as the rung remains true, the instruction moves the data each scan.

MUL Multiply Use the MUL instruction to multiply one value (source A) by another (source B) and place the result in the destination.

Masked Move The MVM instruction is a word instruction that moves data from a source location to a destina- tion, and allows portions of the destination data to be masked by a separate word. As long as the rung remains true, the instruction moves the data each scan.

NEG Negate Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of the source and then place it in the destination. The destination contains the two’s complement of the source.

Not Equal Use the NEQ instruction to test whether two values are not equal. If source A and source B are not equal, the instruction is logically true. If the two values are equal, the instruction is logically false.

NOT This instruction performs a bit-by-bit logical NOT. The operation is performed using the value at source A. The result (one’s complement of A) is stored in the destination.

Instructions Description

NXB Next Branch Marks the beginning of another branch.

Instructions Description

OR This instruction performs a bit-by-bit logical OR. The operation is performed using the value at source A and the value at source B. The result is stored in the destination.

One Shot Rising The OSR instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time. Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on the change of state of the rung from false-to-true. When the rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction go from false-to-true, the OSR instruc- tion will be true for one scan. After one scan is complete, the OSR instruction becomes false, even if the rung conditions preceding it remain true. The OSR instruction will only become true again if the rung conditions preceding it transition from false-to-true. The address assigned to the OSR instruction is not the one-shot address referenced by the program, nor does it indicate the state of the OSR instruction. This address allows the OSR instruction to remember its previous rung state.

OTE Output Energize Use the OTE instruction in the ladder program to turn on a bit when rung conditions are evalu- ated as true.

Output Latch OTL is a retentive output instruction. OTL can only turn on a bit (while OTU can only turn off a bit). This instruction is usually used in pair with the OTU instruction. The program can examine a bit controlled by OTL instructions as often as necessary. When rung conditions become false (after being true), the bit remains set and the correspond- ing output remains energized. When enabled, the latch instruction tells the controller to turn on the addressed bit. Thereafter, the bit remains on, regardless of the rung condition, until the bit is turned off (typically by an OTU instruction in another rung).

Output Unlatch OTU is a retentive output instruction. OTU can only turn off a bit (while OTL can only turn on a bit). This instruction is usually used in pairs with the OTL instruction. The program can examine a bit controlled by the OTU instruction as often as necessary. The unlatch instruction tells the controller to turn off the addressed bit. Thereafter, the bit re- mains off, regardless of the rung condition, until it is turned on (typically by an OTL instruction in another rung).

Reset Use a RES instruction to reset a timer or counter. When the RES instruction is enabled, it resets the Timer On Delay (TON), Retentive Timer (RTO), Count Up (CTU) or Count Down (CTD) instruc- tion having the same address as the RES instruction.

Instructions Description

Retentive Timer Use the RTO instruction to turn an output on or off after its timer has been on for a preset time interval. The RTO instruction is a retentive instruction that begins to count millisecond intervals when rung conditions become true. The RTO instruction retains its accumulated value when the rung conditions become false. The Time Base must be 10 msec. The timer will not work in any other Time Base.

rung conditions are true and the accumulated value is less than the preset value

Rung conditions go false or when the done bit is set

Timer Timing Bit TT (Bit 14)

Timer Enable Bit EN (Bit 15) rung conditions are true rung conditions go false or if the timer is reset with the RES instruction

SOR Start of Rung Marks the beginning of a new rung.

SUB Subtract Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value (source B) from another (source A) and place the result in the destination.

Timer Off Delay Use the TOF instruction to turn an output on or off after its rung has been off for a preset time interval. The TOF instruction begins to count millisecond intervals when the rung makes a true- to-false transition. As long as rung conditions remain false, the timer increments its accumulat- ed value (ACC) each millisecond until it reaches the preset value (PRE). The accumulated value is reset when rung conditions go true regardless of whether the timer has timed out. The Time Base must be 10 msec. The timer will not work in any other Time Base.

rung conditions go false and the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value rung conditions are true

Timer Done Bit DN (Bit 13)

rung conditions are false and the accumulated value is less than the preset value

rung conditions go true or when the done bit is set

Timer Timing Bit TT (Bit 14)

Timer Enable Bit EN (Bit 15) rung conditions are false rung conditions go true

Instructions Description

Timer On Delay Use the TON instruction to turn an output on or off after the timer has been on for a preset time interval. The TON instruction begins to count millisecond intervals when rung conditions become true. As long as rung conditions remain true, the timer adjusts its accumulated value (ACC) each evaluation until it reaches the preset value (PRE). The accumulated value is reset when rung conditions go false, regardless of whether the timer has timed out. The Time Base must be 10 msec. The timer will not work in any other Time Base.

rung conditions are true and the accumulated value is less than the preset value

rung conditions go false or when the done bit is set

Timer Timing Bit TT (bit 14)

Timer Enable Bit EN (bit 15) rung conditions are true rung conditions go false

Examine If Closed Use the XIC instruction in the ladder program to determine if a bit is on. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is on (1), then the instruction is evaluated as true. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is off (0), then the instruction is evaluated as false.

Examine If Open Use the XIO instruction in the ladder program to determine if a bit is off. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is off (0), then the instruction is evaluated as true. When the instruction is executed, if the bit addressed is on (1), then the instruction is evaluated as false.

XOR Exclusive Or Performs a bit-by-bit logical Exclusive Or. The operation is performed using the value at source A and the value at source B. The result is stored in the destination.

Use the PLC editor provided in Alpha Toolbox to create and edit ladder logic files. See section “4.1 Connection” on page 98 on how to connect to Alpha Toolbox with a computer. To get to the PLC Editor in Alpha Toolbox navigate to the Setup/Other/PLC page and click on the Edit button.

The Add Branch button adds a branch to the rung or around an instruction. The List of Instruction buttons add the instruction to the ladder logic. Use the mouse to click, hold and drag the instruction to the desired spot on the ladder. When an instruction starts moving Add Points appear to show all the available places to add the instruction on the ladder. Or click on a branch or other instruction in the ladder and then click an instruction button in the list of instructions to add to the ladder. Undo removes the last item or action and reverting to a previous state. Revert back to any previous state since the last save by clicking Undo multiple times.

Redo revert the effects of the undo action. Multiple Redo’s are allowed through all stored Undo states. Add Initialization Files button will insert predefined strings and integers that are initialized when the PLC starts.

Integers are stored in N7:X files and must be a Decimal number in the range from 32767 to -32768. Strings are stored in ST14:X files and their values must be ASCII characters. Maximum string length is 80 characters plus a carriage return and line feed (CRLF). When string files are written they are displayed in capital letters, but if they were writen in lower case they will be stored in lower case. The Add Rung button adds another rung to the bottom of the ladder. Zoom In and Out allows the user to adjust the size of the view. To move a rung, select the rung by clicking it with the mouse and clicking on one of the green move icons. The rungs may be moved up or down in single steps using the single arrow icons or to the top or bottom using the multiple arrow icons. The red circle with the X delete icon is available for all items on the rung. Select the item to be deleted by clicking it with the mouse and then click the delete icon. The Add Description icon is available for all items on the ladder. Select the item by clicking it with the mouse and then click the Add Description icon. Type in a description and click the green check icon to save it or the red X icon to discard it.

While editing the ladder the Save or Cancel dialog box appears. Press the Apply button to save the changes. Press the Cancel button to discard the changes. When adding Initialization Files the window must first be saved by clicking Apply and then the ladder logic must be saved by clicking Apply again.

Clicking a field will select the box and open its value edit window along with showing the Delete and Add Description icons.

Type the required values for the field and press the Enter key on the computer’s keyboard. This saves the field value in the box. Click on Apply in the Save or Cancel dialog window to save the ladder logic.

Continue adding/ editing rungs/ instructions to complete the ladder logic.

After creating/editing a ladder logic program using RSLogix500, the information must then be converted to a format recognized by the Alpha. First highlight all the rungs from top to bottom, then select Copy from the Edit menu.

Paste the information into a text editor. RSLogix500 adds characters to certain addresses which are carried over to the paste operation. The Alpha controller does not support these added characters. They must be removed or converted to the appropriate address before saving the file for use in the Alpha. See section “3.1.1.1 Wizard Screens” on page 39.

This must now be converted to a JSON file. Type the following BEFORE the first SOR in the pasted logic in the text editor: { CRLF TAB “plc”: TAB { CRLF TAB TAB “1”: TAB { CRLF TAB TAB TAB “700”: TAB “ Then type the following AFTER the last EOR in the pasted logic in the text editor: “, CRLF TAB TAB } CRLF TAB } CRLF }

Save the file using the .json extension and choose “All Files” under Save as type in the Save window.

Once the file is saved it can be put into the Alpha controller. See section “3.1.4.11 PLC Tab” on page 83.

To provide a version, put another JSON parameter tag after the logic or name tag and before the ending brackets. The new tag is”702”: “VERSION”. There is a 15 character limit to this parameter.

Expert and Specialist Alpha controllers can be managers (leaders) to twenty-three other Advanced or Node Alpha controllers or QPM Cordless tools (if the Expert or Specialist is a wireless version). An Ethernet cable connection between them creates a multiple spindle system. The lead Alpha controller manage all I/O connections and ladder logic for the multiple spindle system.

Advanced Alpha controllers can be managers (leaders) to one other Advanced or Node Alpha controller. The lead Alpha controller manage all I/O connections and ladder logic for the multiple spindle system.

The lead and trailing controllers are connected via a standard Ethernet cable to their Ethernet ports, or via IEEE 802.11b/g/n for a QPM Cordless Tool. They must follow all the same addressing requirements on this Spindle Network that a standard Ethernet network requires. For QPM Cordess Tools follow the pairing instructions in the QPM Cordless Tool manual otherwise to connect an Advanced and Node controllers to the lead controller connect the Ethernet cable as follows:

Expert and Specialist Alpha controllers, when used as a lead controller, do not require any setting to be changed to recognize a trailing spindle. Using the keypad or Alpha Toolbox on the trailing controller set the Obtain IP Address From Network parameter to YES, this is set to YES by default. Exit and save the setting. Next connect the lead controller to the trailing controller, at that point the lead Expert or Specialist will then provide the IP Addresses to the trailing controller.

Advanced controllers, when used as a lead spindle require manual pairing of the lead and trailing spindle, connect the Ethernet cable as shown.

Using the keypad, or Alpha Toolbox, on the leading (Advanced) and trailing (Advanced or Node) controller set the Obtain IP Address From Network parameter to NO. Then enter an IP Address and Subnet Mask values for both controllers. Remember to keep the IP Addresses similar but not exactly the same while keeping the Subnet Mask values the same. Type the IP Address of the lead controller into the LEAD IP ADDRESS parameter of the trailing controller. Exit and save the setting.

Once the trailing controller connects to the lead controller the user must acknowledge the addition. The lead controller will display the Add New Spindle dialog box. Select the spindle number for the added controller. Before acknowledgement the trailing controller trying to connect will: • flash the red, green and yellow status lights on the controller and the tool • flash the QPM light on the face of the controller and • display the Identify Spindle message window.

Press the Yes interactive menu button to accept the new spindle connection. Press the No interactive menu button to decline the new spindle connection. After connection the lead spindle will add the new spindle as a tab on the run screen. It will also add and select the ALL tab to show both spindles’ run screen on the lead controller.

See section “2.7 Display” on page 27 for a description of the elements on the run screen. Each spindle must be programmed individually. The ony way to copy programming from one spindle to another is to Export a Jobs file from one controller and Import it to another. To program the spindles from the keypad press the right or left arrow keys to select the desired spindle tab and program as normal. See section “3 Programming” on page 38. The All tab provides the SETUP interactive menu button. The User, Regional and Clock settings for all controllers move here. These settings are global for all controllers in the multiple spindle systems. On connection, or when they are changed, the lead controller’s users and passwords will overwrite the trailing controllers’ users and passwords to match. When the trailing spindle is disconnected it will retain the lead spindle’s users and passwords. Alpha Toolbox will also display all spindles on its Home screen.

See Section “4.3 Editing Parameters” on page 100 to edit the parameter via Alpha Toolbox. Once a specific controller is connected the lead controller will remember it. If the trailing spindle gets disconnected then reconnected there is no need to acknowledge the connection again. However, if a trailing controller is removed (forgotten) and a different controller is attached the different controller must then be acknowledged before it is added to the system. If a trailing controller is offline or disconnected the spindle’s tab on the lead controller’s display will turn red. The lost spindle’s display on Alpha Toolbox will turn red as well. When the spindle comes back online the red will turn to the normal color.

Use the right arrow to select the tab with the disconnected spindle. The color change to red and shows a ”Spindle Communication” Fault to make it obvious that the trailing spindle is not connected.

The lead controller’s QPM logo will blink if it had a trailing controller connected and the trailing controller goes offline or is disconnected. The trailing controller’s QPM logo will blink if it has a value in the Master IP Address parameter and is not connected to a controller with the specified IP Address.

Forget the trailing spindle to stop the logo from blinking on the lead controller. Delete any values in the Master IP Address in the trailing controller to stop the logo from blinking. See section “8.2 Disconnect” on page 177.

When the multiple spindle mode is no longer required remove the Ethernet cable between the two controllers. On the lead spindle navigate to the trailing spindle tab by pressing the right arrow while on the run screen. The disconnected spindle run screen is red. Press the FORGET interactive menu button to delete the trailing spindle connection. The Spindle Delete message appears. Press the Yes interactive menu button to delete the spindle.

The spindle deletes and the run screen will return to a normal single spindle run screen if that was the only trialing spindle. On the trailing spindle delete the values in the Master IP Address parameter, EXIT and save.

Many fastening situations require that two or more fasteners are secured simultaneously which even out the distributed clamp loads on each of the fasteners in the assembly. In a tool control controller such as the Alpha, this is known as synchronization. Expert, Specialist, Advanced, and Node Alpha controllers can synchronize its tool operation with other Alpha controllers over the spindle network so that they start each step of a multi-step strategy at the same time. QPM Cordless B-Series tools cannot be synchronized with other tools. The tools are synchronized so all spindles complete a given step before continuing on with the subsequent step(s).

When multiple Alpha controllers are synchronized, the tool strategy parameters are the same for each. This allows each fastener in the assembly to be driven to the final target in the same manner at a controlled pace. For each step to be synchronized the Delay Between Steps parameter must be greater than zero for each controller.

To synchronize the Alpha controllers simply assign a START input on the lead controller and configure the Spindle number as ALL.

• Never connect the SPINDLE port to a plant network.

The lead controller in a multiple spindle system can communicate to a plant network via the embedded protocols, see section “3.1.3 COMMUNICATIONS Menu” on page 60. The lead controller will collect and transmit the

fastening cycle data after each fastening cycle from each controller in the system via the selected protocol.

Connecting the multiple spindle lead Expert, Specialist, or Advanced controller to a facility network using the ETHERNET port. Use customer’s supplied values and enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway into the lead controller.

If required setup parameters for embedded protocols under Setup>Communications.

Data for each fastening cycle is entered as a line in the fastening cycle record in each controller in the system for its own spindle. However, when a system is ran in Synchornized mode the fastening cycle records get an additional column labled Mult ID. This Multi ID is the same in each spindle in the muti-tool system for the same fastening cycle ran. This allows the user to correlate the same run in each file.Operation The fixtured tools must be started with a remote start switch connected to the START input of the lead Alpha. The lead controller will apply a start to the synchronized trailing spindles in the system. When the remote start switch is depressed all tools will start. All tools will run the first step in the selected Job/ Task. Once each tool has completed the first step it will stop and wait for all tools to finish the step. If all tools finished the step OK then all tools start the next step in the multi-step strategy. This process continues until all steps are complete or any tool times out or is stopped or aborted. All multi-step rules still apply in that the tool must meet the programmed OK window to move on to the next step. If a tool fails a step it will stop which causes all other tools to stop immediately. Once they stop the In-Cycle indicator on the run screen will go away and a SYNC shutoff code is indicated for all controllers except the one that failed to complete a step OK. All tools will be stopped immediately if any single tool is stopped due to an abort event.

When in synchronization mode any Reverse, Job Select, Task Select or PartID input from any of the synchronized spindles will cause all spindles to react to the input. All spindles are required to maintain the same number of accumulated bolt count. If one spindle has a bolt count different from the other the controllers will not run from the START:ALL input. Individual spindles must be ran in recovery operations to get all spindles on the same bolt count to continue or reset the Job to recover.

There are no user serviceable components within the QB Alpha controller. That does not mean that there are no maintenance requirements or actions to be taken to insure optimal performance of the controller.

Store idle tools and controllers in a dry secure area. For maximum tool life, only use lubricants specified in the service instructions. Keep maintenance and repair records on all tools and controllers. Frequency of repair and nature of the repairs can reveal unsafe applications.

The modules require routine maintenance to insure optimal performance. On a monthly basis: • Visually inspect and tighten external connections. • Visually inspect all external cables for excessive wear, frayed wire, or breaks. Replace as needed.

Use the following diagnostics and troubleshooting guide to identify, isolate, and diagnose both mechanical and controller software related problems.

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Physical inspection: worn, frayed, or broken connections or wires

Tool cable Replace

Replace tool cable

Tool Replace/Repair Swap with known, good operating tool Replace/Repair tool

Verify and or adjust tool calibration factor(s) to match calibration factor(s) for tool. May require tool recertification.

Calibration Factors Verify/Adjust Zero or Span Fault

No bolt count on the Run screen for the selected Job/ Task

Create new strategy

Cycle Abort set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Cycle Abort

Torque Target set to zero (0) on torque control strategy

Set higher amount on Torque Target

Tool does not run

Strategy Verify/Adjust

Angle Target set to zero (0) on angle control strategy

Set higher amount on Angle Target

Tool Speed set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Tool Speed

Power set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Power

Acceleration set to zero (0) Set higher amount on Acceleration

See Fault Guide (Section “1.6.2 Electric Service Ratings” on page 20)

Fault Various errors Fault displayed on screen

See Message Guide (Section “1.5 Safety” on page 15)

Press and hold trigger and view message on display

STOP condition or input Remove STOP condition

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Physical inspection: incorrect wiring, termination, connections, devices or programming of I/O assignments

Repair/replace/ reprogram external input and output connections and wiring as necessary based on I/O drawings

External input connections Repair/replace/ reprogram

Tool does not run remotely

Lost + 24 V DC Power Supply Return for repair No or low voltage (<11V) between Pins A and V Return for repair

Power off Turn Alpha on

Power on Plug unit in

No power Restore power

Plugged in Check power at source

No lights, no display

AMP board Failure Return for repair Unit is on, plugged in, and there is power at the source Return for repair

Set Torque Audit Step and or Angle Audit Step on the actual desired audit step

Torque Audit Step and or Angle Audit Step set on undefined step

Completed Rundown - Zero for Torque and Angle Readings

Incorrect Audit Step Verify/Adjust

Set Threshold Torque to zero (0) or a value lower than final torque

Completed Rundown - No Torque and Angle Readings

Tool ran strategy but no fastening cycle values appear on display

Threshold Torque set too high Verify/Adjust

Low-torque reject. Snug Torque has been set to zero (0)

Incomplete rundown (AC/TM) Long bolt Verify/Adjust

Set higher amount on Snug Torque

Incomplete rundown (TC/AM) Prevailing Torque Verify/Adjust Parts changed. Low angle reject. Parts not snug

Insert a Self Tap step prior to audit step

Consistent high angle reject (TC/ AM) Long bolt Verify/Adjust Snug Torque has been left at default value

Set higher amount on Snug Torque

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Torque Target is close to High Torque

Increase High Torque

Consistent high torque reject (TC/ AM) Hard joint Verify/Adjust

Add a within step downshift or turn on ATC or ATC+ to the audit step

No downshift

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, repair it by replacing the motor or gearing or head.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

Overcurrent Fault!

Increase speed of tool, increase downshift speed, or remove downshift altogether. Create a Pre-torque step with a Delay Between Steps of at least 0.05 seconds. Change input voltage to 230 V AC

A larger tool is used with a long rundown or Downshift Speed set very low. Fluctuating incoming AC voltage as seen on the ANALYZE screen.

Fault condition resets when DC bus voltage is within limits.

Low DC bus voltage

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, repair it by replacing the motor.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

GFI Fault!

Use an ohmmeter or the motor tester to check: Phase-to-phase values; they should be equal. Phase-to-ground; they should be >2 Megohms.

Defective Tool Replace defective tool

Replace defective tool

Use a voltmeter to test for proper voltage WHILE the tool is running. Check for proper grounding at the receptacle.

Insufficient AC input power Repair incoming power system

Repair incoming power system

Logic Voltage Fault!

Defective triple power supply or logic board inside controller

Return controller for repair Logic Voltage Fault! appears on display Return for repair

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Exchanging known good tool can verify the tool is the cause of failure

Replace defective tool

Replace defective tool

Defective tool

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Position Feedback Fault!

Whip was removed from extension cable and connected directly to the controller, which then cleared the error

Reduce total cable length to < 60 meters

Fault condition resets when cable length is reduced.

Tool cable longer than 60 meters

Torque Cal. set to a non-standard value (i.e. greater than 20% variance from Nominal Cal. )

Read the Nominal Torque Cal. value from the tool and compare it to the specific Torque Cal.

Set Torque Cal. to the specific torque calibration value for the tool

May require tool recertification

Transducer Span Fault!

Wrong values indicated under SERVICE>TOOL screen

Wrong tool parameters in tool memory board

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Defective tool Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Torque Cal. set to a non-standard value (i.e. greater than 20% variance from Nominal Cal. )

Read the Nominal Torque Cal. value from the tool and compare it to the specific Torque Cal.

Set Torque Cal. to the specific torque calibration value for the tool

May require tool recertification

Remove the object wrapped around gear case. Open gear case and inspect for wrong components or components are in backward

Remove the object wrapped around gear case. Reassemble gear case with proper components.

Transducer Zero Fault!

ANALYZE screen shows a zero offset on the transducer health meter

Tool gear case binding

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Defective tool Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Modify Temperature parameter value. The maximum for handheld tools is 85˚C . The maximum for fixtured tools is 125 ˚ C.

Viewed Temperature value under SETUP-> OTHER-> TOOL tab and compared with Temperature value on ANALYZE screen

Wrong value in Temperature parameter

Modify Temperature parameter value

This error automatically resets when temperature drops and stays below trip point for 8 minutes on QPM tools. It can also be reset by cycling power, however, if the tool has not cooled down this error will reappear in 8 minutes. For fixtured tools turn off Soft Stop .

Tool is hot to touch and shuts down: QPM tools shutdown when tool internal temperature reaches and stays above programmed set point for 8 minutes

Excessive duty cycle Use a larger tool for the job

Temperature Fault!

To prevent an over temperature, modify the strategy by raising downshift speed or eliminating the downshift; Also try a multi-step strategy with a Delay Between Steps of at least 0.5 seconds. For fixtured tools turn off Soft Stop .

Tool is hot to touch and shuts down: QPM tools shutdown when tool internal temperature reaches and stays above programmed set point for 8 minutes

Contact STANLEY Assembly Technologies for help on modifying strategy

Inefficient Rundown Strategy

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Tool has operated without overheating for a significant period of time but suddenly overheats; operator notices change of tool operation (i.e., noise, vibration, and speed are different than normal)

Perform maintenance on tool; open and inspect tool head and gearing; replace any worn or broken parts

Open and inspect tool head and gearing; replace any worn or broken parts

Output / gearing failure

Temperature Fault! Continued

The type of joint (hard or soft) can cause (see Excessive Duty Cycle cause above); switch from 115 V AC to 230 V AC or correct reduced incoming voltage problem

When tested with a voltmeter, or as observed on the ANALYZE screen, incoming voltage is <90% of nominal

Switch from 115 V AC to 230 V AC or correct reduced incoming voltage problem

Reduced incoming voltage

Wrong values indicated under SERVICE-> TOOL screen

Unrecognized Tool! Wrong tool parameters in tool memory board

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Download correct tool INI file to tool

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, see the next row for troubleshooting and repair.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

Tool Communications!

Replace and reprogram the Tool Memory Board in the handle of the tool

Tool Memory Board failure Replace the Tool Memory Board Tool found to be defective

Visual/mechanical inspection of pins in tool handle connector

Defective tool Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Re-engage and lock pins in connector in handle

Check tool whip/ extension cable connections and ensure they are tight

No values indicated under SERVICE>TOOL screen

Tool not electrically connected to controller

Connect tool to controller

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller. If the controller is found to be defective, return to STANLEY Assembly Technologies for repair. If the tool is found to be defective, see the next row for troubleshooting and repair.

Exchanging known good tools controllers and cables can determine which caused a failure

Replace defective tool, cable, or controller

Defective tool, cable, or controller

Open tool handle and check transducer cable connections to ensure tightness and the wiring is not damaged. Remove motor housing sleeve and check blue transducer wire for damage. Remove the gear pack from the motor on the tool and replace the torque transducer; testing with a known good transducer connected to the tool before replacement helps determine which parts are faulty.

Transducer Current Fault!

View transducer health, current and torque output meters on ANALYZE screen and determine if values are in normal range. Tool found to be defective

Transducer / transducer cable within tool failure

Replace transducer / transducer cable in tool

Change tool to a type the controller can run. Look under SERVICE-> Controller for list of supported tools.

The wrong tool type has been connected to the controller.

Change tool to a type the controller can run.

Unsupported Tool! fault on display

Unsupported Tool!

Fault Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Fault Condition

Reboot controller; keep controller off for at least 20 seconds

Reboot controller; keep controller off for at least 20 seconds

Controller Firmware has just been updated

Servo Connection Fault!

Servo Connection Fault! on display

Spindle Communications on display

Lead or trailing controller is off Turn lead or trailing controller on

Turn lead or trailing controller on

Controller is setup as a lead or trailing controller

Default the controller Controller is a single spindle Default the controller

Spindle Communications

Reconnect Ethernet cable between Lead and trailing controllers. If using external switches ensure they are energized.

Visual/Mechanical inspection to ensure cable connections are tight

Reconnect Ethernet cable between Lead and trailing controllers

Ethernet cable disconnected

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Cable has disconnected from controller or PI box Reconnect cable Visual inspection Reconnect cable

Communication Fault

Actual bolt count on display is less than required

Count Fault Operator backed out a fastener Re-fasten loosened fastener

Re-fasten loosened fastener

Operator performed a double hit or fastened more fasteners than was expected

Reset Job or loosen a secured fastener to return to the proper bolt count

Actual bolt count on display is more than required

Reset Job or loosen a fastened fastener

Program Fault

Download a new file and try to load it again

Tool Update Failed error message appears.

Download a new file and try to load it again

Tool INI file is corrupt

See Tool Communications! in section “9.2.1 Fault Guide” on page 184

See Tool Communications! in section “9.2.1 Fault Guide” on page 184

Tool Update Failed

Loss of communication between tool and controller

Tool Communications! fault on display

PLC Message The PLC is providing the message None PLC Message is displayed on controller Press OK

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Press OK. Delete the PLC file. Read the entire file and fix the syntax issue.

Invalid PLC File Bad command or syntax used in the PLC.json file

Read the entire file and fix the syntax issue

Invalid PLC File appears on display

Red, Greed, Yellow Status lights are blinking in sequence on trailing controller and tool with ‘Add Spindle’ dialog box on display of lead controller

Press OK. Choose a number and add the spindle

Trailing spindle is wanting to connect to lead controller

Choose a number and add the spindle

Identifying Spindle

Operator pressed the Identify button under ANALYZE Press OK Display on lead controller is on ANALYZE screen Press OK

Program the selected Task or select another Task that is already programmed

An unprogrammed Task has been selected

Select a different Task

A non-valid Job/ Task has been selected

Select a different Job/Task from 1 to 99

Select a different Job/Task

Tool Disabled

Have a valid part enter the station. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the controller.

Network needs to know that a valid unprocessed part has entered the station

Have a valid part enter the station

Select a new Job/ Task. Reset the Job.

Select a new Job/ Task. Reset the Job.

Accumulated bolt count is equal to Job/Task bolt count

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Remove the active input. Reassign input.

Remove the active input. Reassign input.

A input is applied that is assigned as STOP

Select a different Job/Task. Select a different socket for verification.

Select a different Job/Task. Select a different socket for verification.

Job/ Task Verify inputs not matching selected Job/ Task.

Wait until the controller has finished the boot up process

Wait until the controller has finished the boot up process

The controller is in the process of booting

Tool Disabled Continued

Wait for the timer to reset. Change the Cycle Lock-out timer value.

Wait for the timer to reset. Change the Cycle Lock-out timer value.

The Cycle Lock-out timer is active

Reject Count Exceeded Reset the Job

Reset the Job

Retrain operator on proper process to insure the internal PLC logic is met. Delete the PLC program.

Retrain operator on proper process to insure the internal PLC logic is met

Logic criteria not met for tool operation

Message Possible Cause Probable Solution Major Consideration That Led to Solution To Clear/Reset from Message Condition

Press the MFB to arm the tool. Change the tool’s parameter to not require arming.

Tool is not armed Press the MFB to arm the tool

Tool Disabled Continued

Press the MFB to acknowledge and reset the NOK fastening cycle. Change the MFB parameter to not require Reset Reject.

Press the MFB to acknowledge and reset the NOK fastening cycle

A Reset Reject is active

Users may order installation and repair parts directly from STANLEY, or their agents.

Label, Warning, Pinch Point X5557

Label, Warning, Reaction Point X5571

Label, Warning, Tubenut X5556

Supplementary documentation to better understand the STANLEY QB Alpha Controllers, QPM EB, EA, EC, E-

Series corded tools, and QPM B-Series cordless tools.

For all STANLEY electric assembly tools, the angle information is based on the rotation of the resolver, which is directly attached to the rotor. This information is used for motor commutation, and it also serves as an angle encoder. The rotation of the tool output can be determined by dividing the rotor angle by the total gear ratio for the tool. All things can deflect when loaded. Just as a long steel bar attached to a socket to produce high torque will deflect, likewise the gears within an assembly tool will deflect when subjected to the torque loads. In effect, the gears act as a torsion spring between the rotor and the socket, and it is the deflection of this spring that can give false angle data. In addition to the angular deflection within the gears of the tool, there can also be deflection of the parts of the joint. Whenever this deflection is present in the tool or the joint or the tool mounting device, the angle information derived from the resolver will indicate a larger angle than the tool output actually rotates. This error is directly proportional to the torque level. That is, the deflection at 40 NM will be twice that at 20 NM. In a torque vs. angle curve of a fastening cycle, at the end when the torque reaches its maximum value, the angle will also be at its maximum value. After shut off, as the torque falls to zero, the angle should remain at its maximum value. But in the typical torque vs. angle curve, as the torque falls to zero, the angle also appears to fall some amount. This is not because the fastener is being loosened. It is actually the resolver indicating that the angular deflection of the gears is relaxing to the neutral position. In this case, the maximum angle indicated at the maximum torque was incorrect. The resolver indicated more angle than the tool output actually rotated. To correct for this slight error in angle data, the Alpha controller has a STANLEY-exclusive solution. The Torsion Factor allows the user to input a value that compensates for the torsional spring rate of any part of the fastening system (the gears of the tool, the joint components, or the tool mounting device), and this factor is used to correct the angle reading throughout the fastening cycle. This factor is entered as Degrees per NM, and its default value is zero. If the default value is used, there will be no angular correction. If a value of 0.1 is used, each angle data point (every millisecond) will be modified by subtracting 0.1 times the torque value. For example, at 15 NM, the controller will subtract 1.5 degrees from the angle reading for that sample. At 30 NM, the controller will subtract three degrees for that sample. The easiest way to determine the correct value for the Torsion Factor is to look at a torque vs. angle trace with Torsion Factor set to zero. The amount of degrees that the socket appears to loosen after the maximum torque, divided by that maximum torque is the Torsion Factor. For example, consider a torque vs. angle trace that indicates a maximum torque of 40 NM, and the maximum angle at this torque of 50 degrees. But the angle appears to loosen by four degrees as the torque drops to zero. The Torsion Factor can be determined by dividing four degrees by 40 NM to arrive at a Torsion Factor of 0.1 degrees per NM. When this value is entered into the Torsion Factor parameter, each angle reading will be corrected by this factor. When this factor is set correctly, any torque vs. angle trace will now indicate no apparent loosening of the fastener as the torque drops to zero after shut off; which is exactly as it should be.

Now that the angle can be indicated with great precision, the other challenge is to validate these results against an external torque/angle transducer with monitor. This is not as simple as setting both the controller and the monitor to the same snug torque and comparing the resulting angle. It has been found that a tool’s torque trace will never track exactly the same as the external. The calibration is only the average of a number of readings, generally at a high torque near the maximum capacity of the tool. When

any individual torque reading from the tool’s controller is compared to a torque reading from the external torque monitor, it can easily have a difference of several percent higher or lower. This means that the tool’s controller will start counting angle at a different point than the external torque/angle monitor starts counting. This could be five to 10 degrees different depending of the hardness of the joint. The only way to get consistent results when validating an angle reading against an external monitor is to pre- torque the joint slightly higher than the snug torque. Run the tool on this already-tightened joint, with the snug torque set to the same value in both the controller and the monitor, even if the tool’s transducer and the external transducer do not exactly agree near the snug torque, they will both start counting angle just before the fastener starts to rotate, so their zero angle will be synchronized exactly. For example, if a brake line fitting requires six NM plus 40 degrees, pre-torque the joint to seven NM first. Then change to an Angle Control strategy, with six NM snug torque, plus 40 degrees angle target, and reset the external torque/angle monitor. Then as the tool is run in this angle control mode, the tool will start counting angle as soon as it has six NM (which might have been five or seven NM according to the external transducer), which is before the joint actually starts to rotate. And the external monitor will start counting angle as soon as it has six NM which is also before the joint starts to rotate. This way, both meters are reading angle from the same point, even though the torque readings may differ slightly because of the allowable tolerances in the torque calibration.

After a torque control cycle, typically with multi-spindle applications or on a soft joint, one or more fasteners may be found to have low residual torque (indicating a loss of clamp load). This phenomenon can be caused by material flow, component embedment or relaxation within the individual joints, or by cross-talk. Cross-talk occurs when one fastener arrives at the target torque first, and as the surrounding fasteners are tightened, they can distort parts of the assembly such that the first fastener can lose some of its clamp load. The purpose of this fastening strategy is to re-torque all the fasteners in order to recover any clamp load that may have been lost during (or immediately after) the previous torque control step. This should then result in acceptable residual torque values for all fasteners in an assembly as well as consistent values across many assemblies. A simple solution is to wait a short time to allow for any relaxation to occur, and then run another torque control step. To not impact the fasteners, the torque should be increased at a controlled rate. This is done by ramping up the current limit to the level necessary to deliver the target torque. This re-torque step ends when the target torque is reached. The fastener may or may not rotate, depending on if it did, or did not, experience relaxation. Any fastener that did relax will have its lost torque recovered during this torque recovery step. In order to report the peak dynamic torque from this multi-step fastening cycle, the controller monitors if the fastener actually advances during the torque recovery step. If the fastener does rotate, then the peak torque from the torque recovery step should be reported as the peak dynamic torque for that cycle. If the fastener does not rotate during the torque recovery step, then the peak torque from the previous step should be reported as the peak dynamic torque for that cycle. To report the final tightening angle beyond the snug torque, we need to report the total angle for both the torque control step and the torque recovery step.

The process of tightening a fastener involves stretching, or preloading, the bolt to allow it to store enough force to hold the assembled parts together. Preloading the bolt to a higher load will hold the assembled parts together with more clamp force. Preloading a fastener to the yield point of the bolt material will provide the maximum clamp force possible from each fastener.